JP2019126473A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a technique capable of executing a novel wipe performance.SOLUTION: In a game machine, a wipe display for suggesting a value of setting (for example, setting suggestion wipe image A) is displayed in a non-winning time (ready-to-win failure time). Therefore, it is possible to give a player an opportunity for estimating setting, and execute a novel wipe performance. In addition, if setting suggestion is performed at a place with low incidence (after jackpot or the like), the player is urged to determine setting with a less number of incidence, however, if the wipe performance is executed at a place with high incidence (after ready-to-win failure or the like), an appearance number of the wipe display for suggesting the setting, is increased, for easily making the player get into one's head that, setting may be low setting, or setting may be high setting.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 96

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game.

  Patent Document 1 describes a configuration in which a wipe effect is executed after a display that suggests a detachment is displayed in a reach effect display.

Patent No. 5977417

  Although the conventional technology is a gaming machine capable of executing a wipe effect, a more innovative wipe effect is desired.

  Then, this invention makes it a subject to provide the technique which can perform a novel wipe production | presentation.

  The present invention adopts the following solutions in order to solve the above-mentioned problems. In addition, the wording in the following parenthesis is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this. Further, the present invention can be an invention including at least one of the invention specific matters shown in the following solution means. Furthermore, to each invention specific item shown in the following solution means, an element which limits the invention specific item can be added and subconceptified, and an element which limits the invention specific item can be deleted and superordinated. .

  Solution 1: The gaming machine of this solution is a gaming machine having a plurality of internal states related to a game, wherein a lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery and the predetermined lottery are executed when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game Then, after the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined fluctuation time, symbol display means for stopping and displaying the symbol in a mode according to the result of the predetermined lottery, and the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the symbol The variable display effect execution means for executing the effect, and the result of the predetermined lottery is non-winning, and when the specific effect execution condition is satisfied, the specific effect for executing the specific effect during the execution of the variable display effect After the execution of the effect executing means and the specific effect and before the symbol is stopped and displayed, a wipe display according to the internal state is displayed among a plurality of wipe displays having different display modes. A gaming machine and a wiping effect execution means for executing a flop effect.

The gaming machine of this solution means has the following configuration.
(1) The gaming machine has a plurality of internal states related to the game (a plurality of internal states can be set). The internal state may be, for example, a state related to setting (one of states 1 to 6), a state related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (high probability state or low probability state, that is, presence or absence of probability variation state) It may be a state regarding the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery (a high probability state or a low probability state, that is, the presence or absence of a short time state), a state regarding special variation of the symbol (with special variation or no special variation) And the state regarding the launch position (left-handed state or right-handed state).

(2) When a lottery opportunity occurs during the game (when a game ball enters the start winning opening), a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed.

(3) When the predetermined lottery of (2) is executed, the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and then the symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode according to the result of the predetermined lottery.

(4) A variation display effect (for example, a scroll effect of the effect symbol) corresponding to the symbol variation display of (3) above is executed.

(5) When the result of the predetermined lottery of (2) above is not won and the specific effect execution condition is satisfied (when the specific variation pattern is selected, the effect execution lottery of the specific effect is won In such a case, when the execution condition of the super reach effect is satisfied, the specific effect is executed during the execution of the variable display effect of (4) above.

The specific effect is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the symbol may be stopped and displayed in a winning manner during the execution of the variable display effect.
The specific effect is a second effect (super reach effect) in which the expectation for winning is higher than the first effect (normal reach effect) which suggests that the symbol may be stopped and displayed in the winning mode during the execution of the variable display effect. Is preferred. However, the specific effect may be an ordinary reach effect (reach effect other than the super reach effect), a reach development, an effect, a temper, an effect, or the like.

(6) After execution of the specific effect of (5) above and before the symbol of (3) above is stopped and displayed, the wipe display according to the internal state is displayed among a plurality of wipe displays having different display modes. Execute the wipe effect.

  The wipe effect is an effect that is executed after execution of the specific effect, and is an effect that covers the screen once with the wipe display and switches the screen. The wipe effect is an effect of wiping the image before the wipe effect by the wipe display. The wipe effect is an effect of erasing the image before the wipe effect. The wipe effect is an effect in which the image of the background changes before and after the wipe display is displayed.

In the wipe effect, a wipe display according to the internal state is displayed.
For example, in the case of setting 1, a wipe display (setting 1 image, setting 1 suggestion image) corresponding to setting 1 is displayed, and in the case of setting 2, a wipe display corresponding to setting 2 (for setting 2) Image, setting 2 suggestion image) is displayed. When setting 3 is set, a wipe display corresponding to setting 3 (setting 3 image, setting 3 suggestion image) is displayed. Wipe display (setting 4 image, setting 4 suggestion image) according to 4 is displayed, and when setting 5 is set, wipe display (setting 5 image, setting 5 suggestion image) according to setting 5 is displayed. If the setting 6 is set, the wipe display (the setting 6 image, the setting 6 suggestion image) according to the setting 6 is displayed. In addition, since the wipe display is used only for the suggestion of the setting, the setting 1 or the setting 6 indication image may be displayed, or the setting 6 may be the setting 1 indication image.

  Also, when the internal state is a special symbol height probability state, wipe display (image for special symbol height probability state, special symbol high probability state suggestion image) corresponding to the special symbol height probability state is displayed, and the internal state is special In the case of the symbol low probability state, the wipe display (image for special symbol low probability state, special symbol low probability state suggesting image) corresponding to the special symbol low probability state is displayed.

  Furthermore, when the internal state is a normal symbol height probability state, a wipe display (normal symbol high probability state image, normal symbol high probability state suggested image) according to the normal symbol height probability state is displayed, and the internal state is normal In the case of the symbol low probability state, the wipe display (image for normal symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state suggestion image) corresponding to the normal symbol low probability state is displayed.

  Furthermore, when the internal state is the special fluctuation state, the wipe display (special fluctuation image, special fluctuation suggestion image) corresponding to the special fluctuation state is displayed, and the internal state is in the normal fluctuation state (non-special fluctuation state). In some cases, a wipe display (a normal change state image, a normal change state suggestion image) according to the normal change state is displayed.

  Also, when the internal state is a left-handed state, a wipe display (left-handed state image, left-handed state suggestive image) corresponding to the left-handed state is displayed, and when the internal state is right-handed, the right is displayed. Wipe display (right-handed state image, right-handed state suggested image) corresponding to the hit state is displayed.

  As described above, according to the present solution means, since the wipe effect for displaying the wipe display according to the internal state is performed, the player can be given the opportunity to guess the internal state, and the novel wipe effect is realized. It can be done.

  Further, according to the present solution means, since the wipe effect is executed after the execution of the specific effect executed at the time of non-winning, the number of appearances of the wipe effect is compared with the case of executing the wipe effect at the winning It is possible to increase the number and give the player more opportunities to guess the internal state.

Here, it is also conceivable to execute the wipe effect every time when not winning, but if doing so, the player is given too much opportunity to guess the internal state, and the pleasure of guessing the internal state fades. It will However, at the time of winning only, there is not enough opportunity to guess the internal state.
Therefore, in the present solution, by narrowing down the execution of the wipe effect at the time of non-winning and after the specific effect, it is possible to give the player a chance to guess the internal state.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine according to this solution, in any of the solutions described above, has at least a setting relating to the winning probability of the predetermined lottery as a part of the internal state, and the setting is changeable. The apparatus is provided with the apparatus, and the wipe effect execution unit is characterized in that, as the wipe effect, an effect of displaying a wipe display according to the value of the setting among a plurality of wipe displays indicating the value of the setting is performed. It is a gaming machine.

The following features are added to this solution.
(1) As a part of the internal state, there is a setting related to at least a predetermined lottery winning probability, and a setting changing device (setting operation unit) capable of changing the setting is provided.

  The setting change device is a device for switching settings, which is operated by the operation of a button, a lever or other devices provided in the gaming machine. Also, setting means a combination of actuation probabilities. Furthermore, the operation probability refers to the probability that a combination of symbols for which the condition device is to be activated (a special game will be executed) is displayed.

  The setting change device may be a device capable of changing the setting in which other items are added in addition to the item regarding the winning probability of the predetermined lottery. Further, the setting change device may be a device capable of changing the setting related to the ball.

(2) As a wipe effect, an effect of displaying a wipe display corresponding to the set value among a plurality of wipe displays that suggest the set value of (1) above is executed.

  For example, in case of setting 1, wipe display according to setting 1 (image for setting 1, image for setting 1 suggestion, setting suggested wipe images A to C) is displayed, and in case of setting 2, setting 2 is given. Wipe display according to the setting 2 (setting 2 image, setting 2 suggestion image, setting suggestion wipe images A to C) is displayed, and in the case of setting 3, wipe display according to setting 3 (setting 3 image, setting 3 The indication image and setting indication wipe images A to C) are displayed, and in the case of setting 4, wipe display according to setting 4 (image for setting 4; image for setting 4 indication, setting indication wipe images A to D) Is displayed, and in the case of setting 5, the wipe display according to setting 5 (image for setting 5, image for setting 5 suggestion, setting suggested wipe images A to E) is displayed, and in the case of setting 6, setting Wipe display according to 6 (image for setting 6, image for setting 6 suggestion, setting suggestion Flop image A~F) to display.

  According to the present solution means, an opportunity to guess the setting for the player in order to execute the effect of displaying the wipe display according to the setting value among the plurality of wipe displays indicating the setting value as the wipe effect. It is possible to give an innovative wipe effect.

  Further, according to the present solution means, since the wipe display indicating the setting value is displayed at the time of non-winning, when the setting suggestion is performed at a place where the appearance rate is low (such as after a big hit) It is necessary to judge the setting by the number of times, but by performing the wipe effect in a place with a high appearance rate (after reach loss etc.), the number of appearances of the wipe display suggesting the setting can be increased, "may be a low setting The player can be made more confident that the prediction “of” or the prediction “may be a high setting”.

  Solution 3: In the game machine according to this solution, in any one of the solutions described above, the plurality of wipe displays indicate special wipe indications that suggest the maximum value of the setting, and values of the setting. It is a gaming machine characterized by including a non-special wipe indication suggesting a value other than the maximum value, wherein an appearance rate of the special wipe indication is lower than an appearance rate of the non-special wipe indication.

The following features are added to this solution.
(1) A plurality of wipe displays include a special wipe display (setting suggestion wipe image F) indicating the maximum value (setting 6) as the setting value, and values other than the maximum value (setting 1 to the setting value) 5) include non-special wipe indications (setting suggestion wipe images A to E) suggesting.
(2) The appearance rate of the special wipe display is lower than the appearance rate of the non-special wipe display.

  According to this solution, since the appearance rate of the special wipe display is lower than the appearance rate of the non-special wipe display, it is possible not only to improve the value of the special wipe display but also to display the valuable special wipe display. Thus, it is possible to give the player a double benefit such as a sense of accomplishment that a rare display has been seen and a satisfaction that the highest setting has been determined.

  According to the present invention, a novel wipe effect can be performed.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a game board unit alone. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram showing various electronic equipment with which a pachinko machine was equipped. It is a block diagram which shows the function structure inside an effect control apparatus. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the memory area which main control CPU72 uses. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a setting value and the winning probability of a special symbol lottery. It is a figure which shows the state of a setting key, the decision | availability of setting change, and the decision | availability of insertion and removal. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st example of a procedure of CPU initialization processing (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the 1st procedure example of CPU initialization processing (2/2). It is a figure which shows the command transmission timing of the 1st example of a procedure of CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd example of a procedure of CPU initialization processing (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd procedure example of CPU initialization processing (2/2). It is a figure which shows the command transmission timing of the 2nd procedure example of CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of main loop processing. It is a figure which shows the content of the process performed when a serial communication reception interruption generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the content of the process performed when a timer interruption generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the content of the process performed when an interruption generate | occur | produces at the time of a power-down notice. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of serial communication reception interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the interruption process at the time of a power-off notice. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a dynamic port output process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a performance display monitor output process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between timer interrupt processing and dynamic port output processing. It is a figure which shows the modification of timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a setting change process (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a setting change process (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of switch management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. 51 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of special game management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of special symbol variation pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a loss time change pattern selection table (low probability * high probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of a loss time change pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of a loss time change pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of a loss time change pattern selection table (special area). It is a figure which shows the structural example of a 1st special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a 2nd special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability and high probability non-time shortened state). It is a figure which shows an example of a big hit time change pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of a big hit time change pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state). It is a figure showing an example of a big hit time change pattern selection table (special section). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of special variation management processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of composition of big hit time variable winning a prize device management processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of big hit time special winning opening opening pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of big hit time big prize mouth opening and closing operation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of procedure of big hit time big prize mouth closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the number setting process of special variation. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of small hit time big prize mouth opening pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of small hit time big prize mouth opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of small hit time big prize mouth closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a LED display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st procedure example of an addition number calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd procedure example of an addition number calculation process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state and the number of discharge balls. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a performance display monitor control process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a ball number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of performance display monitor total division process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a division task 1 process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of processing of division tasks 2-8. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of processing of a division task 9; It is a figure explaining the display mode of the performance display monitor. It is a figure explaining the area of the base displayed on performance display monitor 200. FIG. It is a figure explaining the calculation method of a base. It is a timing chart which shows setting related processing basic operation (1/3). It is a timing chart which shows setting related processing basic operation (2/3). It is a timing chart which shows setting related processing basic operation (3/3). It is a figure which shows the process example at the time of power activation (1st process example). It is a figure which shows the process example at the time of power activation (2nd process example). It is a figure which shows the process example at the time of power activation (3rd process example). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a firing position management process. It is a figure explaining the game flow in a non-time shortening state. It is a figure explaining the game flow in a time reduction state. It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect image made to correspond to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure showing the flow of the reach production performed at the time of big hit (winning). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of challenge bonus presentation. FIG. 18 is a continuous view partially showing an example of a treasure challenge effect. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect of fireworks rush. FIG. 18 is a continuous view partially showing an example of an effect of a fireworks bonus effect. FIG. 18 is a continuous view partially showing an example of an effect of normal bonus effect. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of a production of coast mode. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production at the time of winning of super reach production (1/5). It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect at the time of winning of a super reach effect (2/5). It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect at the time of winning of a super reach effect (3/5). It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect at the time of winning of a super reach effect (4/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect at the time of winning of a super reach effect (5/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the production at the time of the divergence of the super reach production, and the production example of the wipe production (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect at the time of the divergence of a super reach effect, and the example of an effect of a wipe effect (2/2). It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of a wipe production. It is a figure which shows the detail of a wipe effect. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation memory production management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of production | presentation symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a production | presentation symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the variation effect pattern selection process at the time of a loss. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a wipe production | presentation selection process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a setting suggestion wipe image selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a mode production management process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of composition of processing at the time of variable winning a prize device operation.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game arcade operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game in the pachinko machine 1, the game ball is a medium in which each one has a game value, and the benefits (profits) enjoyed by the player as a result of the game are, for example, the game ball earned by the player Can be converted into gaming value based on the number of Hereinafter, the entire configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

  Here, in this specification, the left side when viewed from the player seated so as to face the pachinko machine 1 is left, the right side when viewed from the player is the right, the upper side when viewed from the player is the upper side, The lower side is viewed downward from the player, the front side viewed from the player, and the back side viewed from the player.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (rear side) of the integral door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A uniform lock unit 9 is provided inside the right side edge (the left side edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Moreover, the locking tool which is not shown in figure is provided also in the right side edge part (back side) of the integral door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2 corresponding to this, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the united lock unit 9 on the back side thereof is combined with the lock and the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. 7 cannot be opened.

  Further, at the right side edge of the tray unit 6, a cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the uniform lock unit 9 operates to allow the integral door unit 4 to be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . When the whole of them is opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moving like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integral door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 described above as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the above-described inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integral door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board, game board) is formed on the front of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 generally has a shape protruding from the integral door unit 4 to the front side, and the upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper tray 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separated from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. It is paid out to the dish 6b or the lower dish 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 in a state where a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a storage IC, etc.) is inserted into a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees) (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is disposed on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the CR unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper disc ball release button 6d is installed in front of the upper disc 6b in the upper position, and a lower disc ball out lever 6e in the central part in front of the lower disc 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Also, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower plate ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6. The player operates the grip unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails and a windmill (without reference numeral in the figure) are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nail and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Composition of frame front]
In the integral door unit 4, a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 are installed as components for effect. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed on the integral door unit 4 so as to be continuous with the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 respectively, and these glass frame decoration lamps 52 It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 50, 52 are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 described above execute effects by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. In the upper part of the integral door unit 4, speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are respectively incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  Further, at the center of the tray unit 6, a presentation switching button 45 (operation input accepting means) is installed at a position in front of the upper tray 6b. The effect switching button 45 can perform a plurality of types of operations (press once, press multiple times, continuous hit, long press, etc.), and accepts an operation input. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pressing the effect switch button 45 (operation input), Alternatively, during the big hit game, it is possible to generate some effect (for example, a notice effect, a certain change promotion effect, a promotion effect during a big game, etc.).

  Further, a jog dial 45a is installed around the effect switching button 45 so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means, rotary selector). The player can change the contents of the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, for example, by rotating the jog dial 45a.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the power control unit 162, the main control board unit 170, the dispensing unit 172, the flow path unit 173, the launch control board set 174, the dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. Besides, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown) and the like are provided.

The main control board unit 170 incorporates a main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device.
The performance display monitor 200 is disposed in the main control device so as to be visible in the upper left area of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and includes four seven-segment LEDs 201 to 204 .

  The performance display monitor 200 (base display device) displays a base. The performance display monitor 200 displays a setting value (setting value).

The four seven-segment LEDs 201 to 204 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each seven-segment LED has seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and dot segments located at the lower right of the seven segments. It is composed of
Performance display monitor 200 is visible through the transparent case covering main control board unit 170.

  Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a key hole 306 for setting keys. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for RAM clear (initialization of the RAM 76), that is, initialization of a RAM (RWM) provided in the main control device. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key necessary for changing the setting or referring to the setting.

  The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressed through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be disposed outside the transparent case. The setting key key hole 306 is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). For this reason, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is sealed.

  The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch for clearing the RAM. When the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed and the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is input to the main controller 70 and the payout controller 92, and the RAM clear process is performed. Is executed. Note that the RAM clear switch 304 may be provided in the power supply control unit 162. In addition, when main control device 70 receives input of the RAM clear signal without inputting the RAM clear signal to payout control device 92, main control device 70 transmits a RAM clear command to payout control device 92. Also good.

  The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key key hole 306 shown in FIG. 2 are merely examples, and can be arranged at arbitrary positions. In addition, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key key hole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

  The above-described dispenser unit 172 has, for example, a winning ball tank 172a and a winning ball case (without a reference numeral). Among the above, the winning ball tank 172a is installed at the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  Further, the external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). From the external terminal board 160, the game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, winning ball information, door opening information, symbol determination frequency information, big hit information, starting opening information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. will be output to the external electronic device ing.

  The power supply cord 164 is to be connected to a power supply device (for example, AC 24 V) installed at an island facility of the game arcade, for example, to secure the power supply (power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal similarly installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

  FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate. With the game board unit 8 fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-mentioned game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (no reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

  In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is disposed at the center position of the game area 8a. The game area 8a is largely divided into a left portion, a right portion and a lower portion around the effect unit 40. The left portion of the game area 8a is a first game area (left-handed area) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time shortening state) or latent probability change state (high probability non-time shortening state). The right part of is the second game area (right-handed area, specific area) used in the advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state, low probability time shortening state, high probability time shortening state, etc.) . Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first variable winning apparatus 30, and a second variable winning apparatus are provided around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Among these, the middle start winning opening 26 is disposed at the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a.
The second variable winning device 31, the starting gate 20, the first variable winning device 30, and the variable starting winning device 28 are arranged in this order from the top in the right portion of the game area 8a.

  The three left normal winning holes 22 are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the one right normal winning hole 24 (predetermined winning hole) is located between the start gate 20 and the first variable winning device 30. It is arranged.

  The game balls thrown into the game area 8a enter the middle start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24 in the process of flowing down, or enter the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. , Passes through the start gate 20, enters the first variable winning device 30 in the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 in the opening operation.

  Here, there is a possibility that game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8 a mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or enter the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly enters the second variable winning device 31 during opening operation, passes through the start gate 20, or enters the normal winning opening 24. Alternatively, there is a possibility of entering the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation or entering the variable start winning device 28 during the opening operation.

  The game ball having passed through the start gate 20 continues to flow down the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning The game balls that have entered the device 31 are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is entered into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22 due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board), the area of the left portion in the game area 8a (left It is necessary to hit the game ball in the area (to execute so-called "left-hand strike").

  On the other hand, when a game ball is to be placed in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning port 24, the right side region (right-handed region) in the game region 8a. ) To play a game ball (perform so-called “right-handed”).

  The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hitting manner), and accordingly, the right starting winning opening 28a (start winning opening) is entered. Allows the ball (usually motorized role). The variable start winning device 28 has one opening and closing member 28b, and the opening and closing member 28b reciprocates in the left and right direction along the board by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 28b is in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the right start winning opening 28a (there is no space for a game ball to enter). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the opening / closing member 28b is displaced from the closed position toward the open position (falls to the right), and opens the right start winning port 28a. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which a game ball can enter, and can enter the right start winning port 28a (variable start winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28b also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the start winning opening 28a.

  The first variable winning device 30 is the second when the specified condition is satisfied (for example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, the second variable winning device 30) When special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "5 round normal symbol" or "5 round probability symbol"), it enables the winning of the first large winning opening 30b (upper large winning opening) (special Motorized role, first special prize event occurrence means).

  The first variable winning device 30 has one opening and closing member 30a, and the opening and closing member 30a reciprocates in the left and right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The open / close member 30a is in the closed position with its tip facing upward, and at this time, entry into the first large winning opening 30b is disabled (no clearance for the game ball to enter). On the other hand, when the first variable winning device 30 is operated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position toward the open position (falling leftward), and opens the first big prize opening 30b. During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which a game ball can be entered, and can enter the first big winning opening 30b. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the first grand prize opening 30b.

  The second variable winning device 31 is when special conditions are satisfied (for example, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit) (the second special symbol is “five round regular symbols” or “five round odd variation” Operates to stop the display in the form of “pattern”)) and enables winning on the second large winning opening 31b (lower large winning opening) (special electric winning combination, second special winning event occurrence) means).

  The second variable winning device 31 has one opening and closing member 31a, and the opening and closing member 31a reciprocates in the left and right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening and closing member 31a is in the closing position with its tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the second large winning opening 31b (a state in which there is no gap where the game ball can enter). On the other hand, when the second variable winning device 31 is operated, the opening / closing member 31a is displaced from the closing position toward the opening position (falling leftward), and opens the second big winning opening 31b. During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which a game ball can be entered, and can enter the second grand prize opening 31b. At this time, the opening / closing member 31a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the second grand prize opening 31b.

  The arrangement of obstacle nails and the shape of the structure of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 are basically the variable start winning device 28 (the right start winning opening 28a at the time of opening) and the first variable winning device 30 (at the time of opening 1 large winning opening 30b), the second variable winning apparatus 31 (second large winning opening 31b at the time of opening) is a mode that does not extremely impede the flow of game balls, but variable starting when the game ball is open The winning device 28 (right start winning port 28a), the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning port 30b), and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning port 31b) are not necessarily entered. Entering the ball occurs randomly at all.

  The above-mentioned effect unit 40 is installed on the game board unit 8 from the central position to the right side part. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b and 40c on the inner side. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional shaping, and can perform an effect operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like) . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. . As described above, the gaming board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board and the decorativeness of the rendering unit 40. In addition, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board), the decorative property is added not only on the front side but also with various decoration bodies (including a movable body and a light emitter) disposed behind the game board 8b. can do.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the inside of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f (for example, an animal character) for effects. In addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter, the movable object 40 f for effect can execute the effect accompanied by the operation of the tangible object. Due to the effects using these movable bodies 40f, appealing power different from the effects using two-dimensional images can be exhibited.

  In addition, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when the game balls flowing down the game area 8a randomly flow into the ball guide passage 40d, they pass through the inside and roll. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game balls rolled on the rolling stage 40 e eventually flow down into the lower game area 8 a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 just below the ball discharge path 40k. .

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning ports are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8. In addition, the game area 8a including the game balls that have entered the normal winning ports 22, 24, the middle starting winning port 26, the right starting winning port 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are driven. All the game balls thus collected are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (the right side position in the window 4a). That is, in addition to the normal symbol display device 33 and the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a being provided on the right side position in the window 4a, for example, the game board unit 8 also has a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 stored numbers, for example, by a combination of lighting or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which two lamps are turned off together, 0 is displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, 1 is displayed, and in the display mode in which one same lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two memories are displayed and one lamp is lighted and the other lamp is lighted, three memories are displayed, and in the display mode in which two lamps are blinked together, the memory number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  Each time the game ball passes through the above-mentioned start gate 20, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to a display mode after incrementing one by one in order to store the occurrence of the passage serving as the trigger of the operation lottery each time Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lighted (the number of memories is zero), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20 in the normal symbol changeable start state (during stop display) However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  Also, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display the variation state and the stop state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by, for example, 7-segment LED (with dots), respectively. (Symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two memories are displayed and one lamp is lighted and the other lamp is lighted, three memories are displayed, and in the display mode in which two lamps are blinked together, the memory number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is a display after increase by one in the sense that the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 every time the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26. It changes to a mode (up to a maximum of 4), and changes to the display mode after being reduced one by one each time the change of the special symbol is triggered by the entry. In addition, every time the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is increased by one in the sense that the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28a. It changes to the display mode of (up to 4 at maximum), and changes to the display mode after decreasing one by one every time the variation of the special symbol is triggered by the entering of the ball. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the middle start winning opening 26 is in a state where the first special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball enters, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if it is a sphere, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum of 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of incoming balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started. It represents the number of times.

  Further, the gaming state display device 38 includes, for example, LEDs respectively corresponding to the big hit classification display lamps 38a, 38b and 38c, the probability fluctuation status display lamp 38d, the short time status display lamp 38e and the launch position designation lamp 38f. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Configuration on control]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a main control device 70 (main control computer) serving as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress (contents) of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Have. Main controller 70 is incorporated in main control board unit 170.

  The main control unit 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 which is a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 controls the ROM 74, RAM (CPU core and registers not shown). RWM) 76 and other semiconductor memories are integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is also equipped with a random number circuit (random number generator) 75, an interrupt controller (interrupt CTR) 192, a parallel I / O port 79, a timer circuit (PTC) 194, and a serial communication circuit (SCU) 196. ing. Among these, the random number circuit 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery determination, and the generated random number is Input to the main control CPU 72. The interrupt controller 192 receives interrupt requests (XINT interrupt, PTC interrupt, SCU interrupt) from the parallel I / O port 79, timer circuit 194, and serial communication circuit 196, and controls these interrupt requests based on priority. . In addition, the main controller 70 monitors the RAM clear switch 71 for initializing the RAM 76 and changing settings, etc., the parallel I / O port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and various states. Peripheral ICs such as a reset controller for generating reset are provided as necessary, and these are mounted on the circuit board together with the main control CPU 72. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion). The I / O port of the main controller 70 may be in a serial format.

  Further, in the main control device 70, a setting change device 300, a setting key switch 302, and a RAM clear switch 304 are provided. Main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the settings by operating setting change device 300. The setting change device 300 is a device for switching the setting (at least the setting related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery), and operates by operating the RAM clear switch 304 provided in the pachinko machine 1. Also, setting means a combination of actuation probabilities. Furthermore, the operation probability refers to the probability that a combination of special symbols that will cause the condition device to operate (a jackpot game will be executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state in accordance with the rotation of the setting key that is essential for switching the setting. Although the procedure of the change of a setting can employ | adopt various methods, it can carry out in the following procedures, for example.

(1) First, the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 6 a and rotated in the right direction to open the integral door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the setting key key hole for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided inside the pachinko machine 1, the setting key is inserted into the setting key key hole, and the setting key is inserted. Rotate to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) Thereby, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key can not be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

  Here, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated rightward, the setting is changed (setting change state). On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is turned to the right, the setting can be referred to (setting reference state).

(6) In the state where the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of six steps, for example, by pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, the performance display monitor 200, a dedicated 7-segment LED, or a gaming state display device 38 (such as a special symbol display device).

(7) In the case of the slot machine, when the target setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since there is no lever in the pachinko machine 1, an alternative process instead of the lever ON process (for example, left the setting key A process of rotating in a direction, a process of turning on a setting change confirmation button (not shown), etc.) or a lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is turned counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the change in setting is confirmed based on the input signal.

(8) When the setting change is confirmed, the setting key can be removed from the key hole for the setting key. By this operation, when the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200, the dedicated 7-segment segment LED, or the gaming state display device 38, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, the door of the pachinko machine 1 is closed. Thereby, the change of setting is completed. When the setting change is completed, the normal game is started.

  When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed set value in the set value buffer of the RAM 76. The set value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Summary of setting change]
The outline of the setting change is as follows.
When the power is turned on with "setting key ON", "inner frame opened state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the setting is changed (setting change mode) after clearing the RAM.
When the setting is being changed, there is no display of the main indicator (various lamps included in the gaming state display device 38), and the firing of the gaming balls, the winning balls of the gaming balls, and the like can not be performed at all.

  In this case, “rn.” Is displayed on the two left 7 segment LEDs (identification segment) of the performance display monitor 200, and the set value is displayed as “−1” on the two right 7 segment LEDs (ratio segment). The When the RAM clear switch is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1-6.

Then, when "setting key OFF" is set, the setting is decided, and the display of the ratio segment is such that the segment of "-" is turned off (non-displayed) like "blank (non-display) 1".
In this state, when the inner frame is closed (in fact, when the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in the setting change is ended, and once it is switched to the state before the power is turned off, the normal gaming state is entered. Transition.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are combined is described. However, a setting change switch may be provided separately from the RAM clear switch 304.

[Overview of setting reference]
The outline of setting reference is as follows.
When the power is turned on with "setting key ON", "inner frame opened state", and "state not pressed by RAM clear switch", the setting reference state (setting reference mode) is established.
As in the setting change state, in the setting reference state, there is no display on the main indicator, and the game ball can not be fired or the game ball can not be won at all.

  In this case, “rn.” Is displayed on the two left 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left of the performance display monitor, and the set value is “blank (not displayed) 1” on the right two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) Is displayed. Further, in the state of referring to setting, the setting value does not change even if the RAM clear switch is pressed.

In this state, when “setting key OFF” and “inner frame closed state” are entered (actually when the closed state continues for 100 ms), the setting reference state is terminated, and once the power is turned off. After transitioning to the state, transition to the normal gaming state is made.
In the present embodiment, the setting reference cannot be performed during the normal game, but the setting reference may be performed during the normal game.

  A gate switch 78 for detecting passage of the game ball is integrally provided in the above-mentioned start gate 20. In addition, the game board unit 8 corresponds to the medium start winning opening 26, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively, and the middle start winning opening switch 80 and the right start winning opening. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. The respective start winning opening switches 80, 82 are for detecting entry of gaming balls into the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a). The first count switch 84 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening) and counting the number thereof. Furthermore, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning port 31b) and counting the number thereof.

  Similarly, in the game board unit 8, a first winning opening switch 86 for detecting entry of gaming balls into the normal winning opening 22 and a second winning opening switch for detecting entry of gaming balls into the normal winning opening 24. 81 is equipped. Although the configuration using the common winning opening switch 86 is taken as an example for the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side, for example, three winning opening switches are installed, and the game ball for each normal winning opening 22 is Incoming balls may be detected individually.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). In the present embodiment, the winning detection signal from the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, and the second winning opening switch 81 is A signal is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, a connection terminal, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

  Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with an out switch 99. The game board unit 8 joins the game balls that have passed through the normal winning ports 22, 24, the middle starting winning port 26, the right starting winning port 28a, the first large winning port 30b, the second large winning port 31b, and the out port 32. A joining passage is formed, and an out switch 99 is provided in the joining passage. The out switch 99 detects a game ball passing through the merging passage, and a detection signal is input to the main control device 70 each time the game ball is detected. Main controller 70 counts the number of out spheres based on the detection signal input from out switch 99. Here, since the game balls fired in the game area 8a always pass through the junction path and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, the out switch 99 has the number of shot balls fired in the game area 8a, That is, the number of discharges (out ball number) discharged from the game area 8a is counted.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 via the panel relay terminal board 87.

In addition, a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main controller 70 via a panel relay terminal board 87. The performance display monitor 200 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the base calculation status, and controls the lighting states of the 7 segments 201 to 204.
Although the performance display monitor 200 is described as being connected to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal board 87, the performance display monitor 200 may be connected to the main control apparatus 70 not via the panel relay terminal board 87. The performance display monitor 200 may be disposed as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 corresponds to the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively, the normal electric combination solenoid 88, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 and the first 2 large winning opening solenoid 97 is provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97 operate (excitation) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open and close the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. Or the probability variation region blade member 31d is moved. Note that these solenoids 88, 90, 97 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal plate 87.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. The contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integral door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, it generates a door open information signal as an external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (a payout control computer) controls the operation of the above-described payout device unit 172. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 also includes a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM (RAM) 98 together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured as an integrated LSI. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the winning ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of gaming balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as an external information signal together with a prize ball instruction command.

  The payout control device 92 can communicate with the main control device 70, and pays out the game ball based on the payout command transmitted from the main control device 70.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The award balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with game balls, the game balls that have been paid out more than those are described above. Into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends the further prize ball operation even when the prize ball instruction command is received from the main control CPU 72, and stores the number of unpaid prize balls remaining in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a launch control board 108 and a launch solenoid 110 are installed. A ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Moreover, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of launching game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8a as described above. Note that the firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle, ball launching device) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. Then, the firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

  A discharge relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and signals from the discharge lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the release stop switch 116 are transmitted to the discharge control board 108 via the discharge relay terminal plate 118. Is done. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player manipulates the firing handle, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) according to the amount of manipulation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength to launch the game ball is adjusted in accordance with the amount of operation of the player. When the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or the emission stop signal is input from the emission stop switch 116, the drive circuit of the emission control board 108 stops the drive of the emission solenoid 110. To do. In addition, when the game device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118 and the CR unit is not connected to the device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the same release control board The drive circuit 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  Further, the tray unit 6 incorporates a frequency display board 122 and a lending and return switch board 123. Among these, the frequency display substrate 122 is provided with a display (a three-digit seven-segment LED) for the frequency display unit. In addition, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending and return switch substrate 123, and when the sphere lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is borrowed. And, it is transmitted from the return switch substrate 123 to the CR unit via the game apparatus connection terminal board 120 such as a game ball. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. In addition, when the value medium is not inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the input value medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display substrate 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium You can also display a message prompting you to

  Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the presentation control apparatus 124 (computer for presentation control) as a structure on control. The effect control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with an effect control CPU 126, which is a central processing unit, on a circuit board (composite sub-control board). The effect control CPU 126 is configured as an LSI including a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 and an eDRAM 131. The effect control device 124 is equipped with various functions necessary for realizing the effect in the pachinko machine 1. For example, to control devices such as a VDP 152 for rendering an effect screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, lamps 46 to 52 that produce visual effects, a panel lamp 53, a movable body motor 57, and a status LED 58. Driver IC 132, voice IC 134 for controlling the speakers 54, 55, and 56 for outputting voice, and the like. The functional configuration inside the effect control device 124 will be described later in detail with reference to another drawing.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are mutually connected via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. In the communication harness, depending on the bus width of various effect commands (hereinafter referred to as “subcommand” or “effect command”) transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124. A parallel format may be adopted, or a serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of each driver (I / O).

  In this embodiment, the sub connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and drive signals from the driver IC 132 and the audio IC 134 pass through the sub connection board 136 and various lamps 46 to 52 and speakers 54, 55,. 56 is applied. Further, the sub connection board 136 is connected with an effect switching button 45 and a volume adjustment switch (not shown), and when the player operates the effect switching button 45 and the volume adjustment switch, those contact signals are transmitted through the sub connection board 136. It is input to the production control device 124. Further, a jog dial 45a is connected to the sub connection board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is inputted to the effect control device 124 through the sub connection board 136. In addition, although the example which connected the production | presentation switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a to the sub connection board | substrate 136 is given here, when installing a saucer electrical decoration board, the presentation switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a are connected to a saucer electrical decoration board. It may be

  In addition, a driver board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 and a status LED 58 are connected to the driver board 138 in addition to the board surface lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via a link mechanism (not shown), for example. The drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53, the movable body motor 57, and the status LED 58 via the driver board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 incorporates a switching power supply circuit and can generate necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V or the like) from the outside power (for example, AC24V or the like) taken from the island facility through the power cord 164. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the firing control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is also supplied to the CR unit via the game apparatus connection terminal board 120 such as a game ball. The low voltage power (for example, DC + 5 V) for logic is generated by a power supply IC (three-terminal regulator or the like) incorporated in each device. Further, as described above, the power control unit 162 is grounded to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are externally transmitted from the external terminal plate 160 via the payout control device 92. Is output. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. Signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected, for example, by a hall computer (not shown) of the game arcade. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

[Internal configuration of effect control device]
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124. As shown in FIG.
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a role as an effect control processor that controls the effect as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188 which are necessary for the effect control device 124 to function as an effect control processor. The control ROM 180 stores a basic program related to control of presentation. The effect control CPU 126 accesses the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and controls the effect by executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC 188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is properly performed (whether the processing is completed within the estimated time) and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU 126 There is. When a signal (clear pulse) for clearing the watchdog timer of the watchdog timer IC 188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC 188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for causing the effect control CPU 126 to start reset. Do. Thereby, the production control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

  In addition to these functions, the effect control device 124 includes an SRAM 182 that is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real-time clock (RTC) 184 that performs time management. A lithium battery 186 that supplies backup power to the SRAM 182 and the RTC 184, peripheral ICs such as an input / output driver and a counter / timer circuit (not shown), and the like are provided. The lithium battery 186 stores this electric power and charges itself while driving power is supplied from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124. The SRAM 182 and the RTC 184 are connected to the lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the supply of drive power from the power control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is interrupted. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the RTC 184 continue to operate until the charge of the lithium battery 186 is cut (for example, about one and a half months). The stored information can be held for a while even under power-off conditions.

  The effect control program is configured to save, in the SRAM 182, information on security, monitoring, defects and the like that should not be easily erased. Thereby, for example, when some trouble occurs in the production control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is collected (or inspected in the installed state), and the cause investigation of the trouble is advanced by analyzing the information held in the SRAM 182. It becomes possible.

The effect control device 124 is a device that controls the contents of effects relating to a game.
The RTC 184 is a device that can communicate with the effect control device 124 by serial communication or the like and holds current time information (predetermined information). The RTC 184 is a device that counts the current time and updates the current time information regardless of whether or not the gaming machine is in a power-off state.

  By the way, in the production control executed by the production control CPU 126 according to the program stored in the control ROM 180, as described above, the liquid crystal display 42, the various lamps 46 to 53, the speakers 54, 55, 56, the status LED 58, etc. The control of the production using the device is included. The flow of the production control is roughly divided into two stages of “overall control (reproduction instruction)” and “individual control (reproduction control)”. The effect control CPU 126 first receives an effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect according to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the effect control CPU 126 generates instruction data in which the instruction content is converted into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 relays between the effect control CPU 126 and each device. (Individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and effects reproduction using each device in the pachinko machine 1 (screen display, audio output, lamp emission, movable body displacement) Etc.) is realized.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of effect control, and these functions are realized by using the resources of the effect control CPU 126 separately. At the stage of the overall control, the effect control unit 210 in the effect control CPU 126 becomes an operation subject. In the individual control stage, the display control unit 220, the audio control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the motor control unit 226 or the sensor control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 are operated according to the device to be controlled. It becomes. The effect control unit 210 may directly control the control devices 134, 152, 198, and 199.

  The effect control device 124 functions as an effect control processor in the overall control stage, whereas it functions as an effect reproduction processor in the individual control stage. Therefore, in addition to the circuit board (effect display control board) on which the VDP 152 is mounted and the CGROM (image / sound ROM) 190, the effect control device 124 further includes an audio IC 134 for controlling various devices used for reproduction of effects. An LED driver 198, an SMC (serial control controller) 199, and a driver IC 132 are provided.

  The CGROM 190 stores a drawing material (moving image data) constituting an effect screen and a sound material (audio data) output with the progress of the effect in a compressed state by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the audio IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

  The VDP 152 is a processor dedicated to rendering effect images, and is integrated with the effect control CPU 126 in one chip. Also, the VDP 152 incorporates a VRAM 156 mainly used for developing a drawing material, and a drawing material decoder 157 for decompressing (decoding) the drawing material in a compressed state. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the display control unit 220, reads the necessary drawing material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. The rendering material decoder 157 decodes the read rendering material, renders a rendering image on the VRAM 156, and develops the rendering image in a frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). Reproduction of the effect screen is realized by individually driving each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data.

  The audio IC 134 is a sound generator that generates audio such as sound effects and BGM to be reproduced during execution of effects, and is connected to an amplifier, an external DRAM, and a CG bus (not shown). The audio IC 134 incorporates an audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) the compressed audio material. The audio IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the audio control unit 222 and reads the necessary audio material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read audio material is decoded using the audio material decoder 135 on the external DRAM. By outputting the decoded audio to the glass frame speakers 54 and 55 and the outer frame speaker 56 via an amplifier, audio reproduction (or a larger number of channels) of stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch is realized. The audio IC 134 adjusts the output volume of each speaker 54, 55, 56 based on a contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated.

  The LED driver 198 controls lighting patterns and luminance patterns of various lamps 46 to 53 and the status LED 58 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. The LED driver 198 employs an addressed synchronous serial system. First, the LED driver 198 controls the lighting pattern and the luminance pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers drive data corresponding thereto to the driver IC 132.

  The SMC 199 controls a drive pattern of the movable body motor 57 serving as a drive source of the movable body 40 f for effect provided in the inside of the effect unit 40. In SMC199, the clock synchronous serial system is adopted. First, the SMC 199 generates a drive pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the motor control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Although SMC 199 is used here only for motor drive pattern generation, since SMC 199 can generate not only the motor but also the lamp lighting pattern and luminance pattern, the SMC 199 is applied instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, the SMC 199 may be configured to generate both lamp and motor data patterns.

  The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp and the motor based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 and the SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes, for example, switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) IC and MOSFET (not shown), and switches (or switches duty) drive voltages applied to the various lamps 46 to 53, the movable body motor 57, and the status LED 58. Then, by managing the operation, it is possible to realize the effect reproduction using the lamp and the movable body. Of the various lamps 46 to 53, the panel lamp 53 is an LED built in the effect unit 40, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the like. It is equivalent. The status LED 58 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and is a lamp that indicates a status state (for example, a state before system initialization, a state after system initialization, a normal state, etc.) of the effect control device by a lighting pattern. Moreover, although the example in which the glass frame decoration lamp 52 is connected to the sub connection board 136 is mentioned here, the receiver electric decoration board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass board decoration lamp 52 It may be configured to be connected to the driver IC 132 via

  In addition, the driver IC 132 transfers a contact signal input when the effect switching button 45 or the jog dial 45 a is operated to the effect control unit 210 via the sensor control unit 228. The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the effect content to be reproduced based on the content of the contact signal to be transferred.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a memory map of a memory area used by the main control CPU 72. As shown in FIG.
The memory area used by the main control CPU 72 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 74 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 76.

  The area (first area) of addresses 0000H to 0BFFH is an area in which the program code (program) of the used area can be stored. The program code of the use area is first information (for controlling the progress of the game) necessary for the execution of the game.

  In the area (first area) of addresses 0000H to 0BFFH, there is a part of the program code (first information) in the use area and the program code (second information) that is not necessary for the game execution. Special program code (special information) is stored.

  The area of addresses 0C00H to 0FFFH is an unused area.

The area (first area) of addresses 1000H to 1BFFH is an area capable of storing program data (data) of the used area. The program data of the use area is the first information necessary for the execution of the game.
The area of the addresses 1000H to 1BFFH (first area) is part of the program data (first information) in the use area and the program data (second information) that is not necessary for the game execution. Special program data (special information) is stored.

  The area of addresses 1C00H to 1FFFH is an unused area.

The area (second area) of the addresses 2000H to 2FFFH is an area where program code and program data outside the area can be stored. The program code / program data outside the area is second information that is not necessary for the execution of the game (for example, processing related to processing for performing a test defined by the gaming machine rules and processing related to a performance display monitor).
In the area (second area) of the addresses 2000H to 2FFFH, non-special program code / non-special program data (non-program code / non-special program data) which is the remaining information of the program code / program data (second information) which is not necessary for executing the game Special information) is stored.

  The area of addresses 3000H to EFFFH is an unused area.

The area of the addresses F000H to F1FFH is used as a work area of the used area and a stack RAM.
The area of addresses F200H to F3FFH is used as a work area outside the area and a stack RAM.
These areas are used as stack areas for temporarily saving areas and data temporarily used when a program of the used area is being executed or a program outside the area is being executed.

  The area of addresses F400H to FFFFH is an unused area.

  In the memory area of the ROM 74, in addition to the use area and the area outside, an area for storing arbitrary data such as a program title and version, and a program for storing information necessary for the main control CPU 72 to execute the program A management area may be provided.

  As described above, the ROM 74 and the RAM 76 (storage means) of the present embodiment are used areas (first areas) that can store program codes and program data (first information) necessary for the execution of the game, and the game It has an area (second area) which can store program code and program data (second information) not required for execution.

  Here, the used area is an area in which the capacity that can be used for controlling the progress of the game is defined by the gaming machine rules, and the outside area is an area that is not included in the calculation of the available capacity. .

  The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) is configured to perform pachinko based on program code / program data (first information) necessary for game execution and program code / program data (second information) not required for game execution. Control the machine 1 (game machine) (control means).

  The use area (first area) includes program code / program data (first information) necessary for game execution and program code / program data (second information) not required for game execution. Part of special program code and special program data (special information) are stored.

  Outside the area (second area), there are non-special program code and non-special program data (non-special information) that are the remaining information of program code and program data (second information) that are not necessary for the game execution. It is stored.

  The special program code and special program data (special information) are different information for each model in a plurality of types of different types of game contents, and the non-special program code and non-special program data (non-special information) are the contents of the game This information is common to each model in different types of models.

  Therefore, when changing the specification of the gaming machine, it is necessary to change the special program code and the special program data. On the other hand, the non-special program code and non-special program data do not need to be changed even if the specification of the gaming machine is changed.

  In the special program code / special program data (special information), among the processes for calculating the base, a determination process for determining whether or not to calculate the base based on the gaming state, and the value of the number of winning balls Information on at least one of the confirmation processes is included. Either the determination process or the confirmation process may be non-special program code or non-special program data (non-special information).

In the present embodiment, due to the performance of the main control CPU 72, even when the same instruction (program code) is used, the processing speed differs depending on whether it is used in the use area or outside the area. is there. For example, when using an LDQ instruction (special load instruction) in the used area, the processing speed is increased, but when the LDQ instruction is used outside the area, the processing speed is not increased. Therefore, outside the area, it is necessary to use an LD instruction (normal load instruction) whose processing speed is slow. The reason for this is that when the LDQ instruction is used outside the area, it is necessary to add stack pointer, Q register save, reset, and return processing, and the processing speed is rather slow.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, the processing speed is faster when the process related to the used area is executed than when the process related to the outside of the area is executed.

  The main control CPU 72 processes (first process) the use area necessary for the execution of the game by using (by executing) the program code / program data stored in the use area (first area). It can be executed (first process execution means).

Further, the main control CPU 72 uses the program code / program data stored outside the area (second area) (by executing), so that the processing outside the area that is not required for the game execution (second process) ) Can be performed (second processing execution means).
The above is the configuration example regarding control of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the setting value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.
When the setting value is “1”, the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is “1/319”.
When the set value is "2", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/299".
When the set value is “3”, the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is “1/279”.
When the set value is "4", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/259".
When the set value is "5", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/239".
When the set value is “6”, the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is “1/199”.

  When the set value is “1” to “6”, the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is “1/32”.

  In this way, the larger the set value, the more advantageous the special symbol lottery winning probability (low probability state), and the more advantageous the situation is for the player.

  In the illustrated example, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is described as an example in which a setting difference is provided only in a low probability state. However, a setting difference may be provided in a high probability state. Further, regarding the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may have a setting difference. Furthermore, a setting difference may be provided in other items (for example, the transition rate to the high probability state, the transition rate to the time shortening state, the number of times of probability change, the number of time reductions, the number of special changes, etc.).

  As described above, the gaming machine has a plurality of internal states regarding the game, and there is a setting regarding at least the probability of winning a predetermined lottery as a part of the internal states.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the state of the setting key, the possibility of changing the setting, and the possibility of inserting and removing.
If the state of the setting key is ON (when the input signal from the setting key switch 302 is ON when rotating in the right direction), setting change (including setting reference) is possible, and the setting key It is impossible to pull it out. That is, the setting key can not be removed while changing the setting or referring to the setting.

  On the other hand, when the state of the setting key is OFF (when rotating to the left, when the input signal from the setting key switch 302 is OFF), setting change (including setting reference) is impossible. It is possible to remove the key. That is, the setting key can be removed when the setting is not being changed or the setting is not being referenced.

For setting change and setting reference, if it is possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting reference state only by button operation without using the “setting key”, for example, a person who does not have the authority to change the setting (for example, hall staff or malicious Player etc.) can change the setting or refer to the setting, and there is a risk such as setting leakage.
Therefore, with regard to setting change and setting reference, the use of the “setting key (key)” is an essential condition.

  The state of the "setting key" is two states of ON or OFF. The state of the “setting key” can be confirmed by a signal from the setting key switch 302. Maintain the ON state and the OFF state by the operation of "setting key".

Insertion and removal of the "setting key" is possible only when the state of the "setting key" is OFF. The “setting key” can be inserted into the setting key key hole 306.
The setting key key hole 306 exists in the transparent case covering the main control board unit 170 and can be operated without opening the transparent case.

For example, the following conditional branch is included in the program code of main controller 70:
The transition condition to setting change or setting reference includes that the setting key is ON.
The transition condition to the setting determined state during setting change includes that the setting key is turned from ON to OFF. Alternatively, it simply includes "the setting key is in the OFF state".
The termination condition during setting change or setting reference includes that the setting key is OFF.

  As a result, without the “setting key”, it is not possible to shift to a setting change or reference setting, and the setting value cannot be determined. It can prevent.

  Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[CPU initialization (main) processing in main controller]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts the CPU initialization process in the main controller 70. The CPU initialization process restores the gaming state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information stored at the time of the previous power shutoff or clears the backup information to the contrary, the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 is It is a process to prepare. Further, the CPU initialization process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for securing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjustment of the initial state.

  10 and 11 are flowcharts showing a first procedure example of the CPU initialization process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S100: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector table. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the interrupt vector table in the I register (interrupt vector register) used for interrupt control. In the interrupt vector table, the priorities required to control interrupt requests generated during execution of the CPU initialization process are defined, and the main control CPU 72 executes a plurality of processes based on the priorities defined in the interrupt vector table. Execute interrupt requests in order.

  Step S104: The main control CPU 72 saves the RAM clear signal (the input signal from the RAM clear switch 304). More specifically, the value of the input port to which the RAM clear signal is input is obtained twice in succession, and the logical sum of these values is saved as the input port value.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 executes standby processing here. This process is a process of waiting for the power supply to stabilize and a process of waiting for the start of the effect control device 124. The main control CPU 72 secures a certain waiting time (for example, about several thousand ms, about 3.1 seconds) after the power is turned on, and a power-off notice signal (a signal indicating that the power is being cut off) during that time Check the). Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it checks the bit of the input port of the power-off notice signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The power-off notice signal is input by an IC that monitors the voltage level of the drive voltage. Then, if the input of the power-off notice signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 resumes the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S108: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect set value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted thereafter.

  Step S109: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the inner frame is open and the setting key is ON. The inner frame open can be confirmed by the contact signal from the plastic frame open switch 93. The inner frame opening may be confirmed by a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 or another inner frame opening switch (not shown). Further, whether or not the setting key is ON can be confirmed by an input signal from the setting key switch 302.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the inner frame is opened and the setting key is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S110. On the other hand, when the inner frame is opened and it can not be confirmed that the setting key is ON (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S113 (in-page connector 1 → 1).

  Step S110: The main control CPU 72 refers to the RAM clear signal by checking the specific bit of the input port value saved in the previous step S104, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S112. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S111a.

  Step S111a: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the setting changing flag is “00H”.

  The setting changing flag is stored in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. “00H” indicates that a normal game is in progress, “01H” indicates that the setting is being changed / before being determined, and “02H”. Indicates that the setting is being changed or after it is determined, and "03H" indicates that the setting is being referred to.

  A setting value is also stored in the setting value buffer, and the setting value buffer is not cleared even when the RAM clear is activated. The reason for this is that even if the power is turned off during the setting change and the RAM clear is started, the setting changing state is continued when the setting reference condition is satisfied. Also, it does not affect the value of checksum.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the setting changing flag is “00H” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S111b. On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the value of the setting change flag is “00H” (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S114 (in-page connector 2 → 2).

  Step S111 b: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting “03H” in the setting change flag. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S114 (in-page connector 2 → 2).

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting "01H" in the setting change flag. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S120 (in-page connector 3 → 3).

  Step S113: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S120 (in-page connector 3 → 3). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S114.

  Step S114: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for confirming whether the backup flag and the checksum are normal.

  Regarding the backup flag, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the backup flag is set (whether backup information is stored in the RAM 76). If the backup is normally completed by the process executed at the previous power shutdown and a specific value (for example, “01H”) is set in the backup flag, it is determined that the backup flag is normal. The backup flag is set to a specific value when normal backup processing is performed.

  Regarding the checksum, the main control CPU 72 executes a checksum on the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checksums all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 except for the backup flag and the checksum buffer. If the checksum result is normal, the main control CPU 72 determines that the checksum is normal.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the backup flag and the checksum are normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S116. On the other hand, when it can not confirm that the backup flag and the checksum are normal (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S120.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes initialization processing at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the storage content of a partial area of the RAM 76. The partial area of the RAM 76 is a memory area to be cleared when power is restored.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes backup restoration processing. The main control CPU 72 restores the saved valid backup information. As a result, the main control CPU 72 can restore the power-off state.

  Step S118: The main control CPU 72 sends a command to the effect control device 124 at the time of power recovery (for example, a power recovery specification command indicating that it has recovered from power shutdown and started up) and a payout command (for the payout control device 92). Set the command to be sent. When this process ends, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S125.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initialization process (RAM clear process) when the RAM is cleared. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents of the used area of the RAM 76 to be cleared when the RAM is cleared. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased. The stored contents outside the area of the RAM 76 may or may not be cleared. The value of the setting change flag may or may not be cleared. If the value of the setting change flag is cleared, the determination in step S131a to be described later is always negative (No). Therefore, when the determination in step S131a to be described later is performed based on the state before the RAM is cleared, the setting change is performed. It is preferable not to clear the value of the middle flag. Further, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S124: The main control CPU 71 sets a command to be sent to the effect control device 124 when the RAM is cleared (for example, a RAM clear designation command indicating that the RAM clear has been activated) and a payout command (a command for the payout control device 92). .

  Step S125: When the RAM is cleared, the main control CPU 71 executes a common initialization process when the power is restored.

  Step S126: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the payout command (power supply recovery designation command) set in step S118 or the payout command (RAM clear designation command) set in step S124 to the payout command buffer.

  Step S128: The main control CPU 72 executes a subcommand output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first outputs the effect command (power supply return designation command) set in step S118 or the effect command (RAM clear designation command) set in step S124 to the sub-command transmission buffer. In addition, the main control CPU 72 performs other various effect commands necessary for effect control (for example, model designation command, state designation command, special figure destination determination effect command, effect command when operating memory number increases, effect when operation memory number decreases) A command, a count cut counter value command, a normal game management phase command, a special game management phase command, a launch position designation command, etc. are set, and these are output to the sub-command transmission buffer. At this time, the main control CPU 72 can also set different values for these effect commands at the time of power return and at the time of RAM clear.

  For example, when power is restored, the value of each effect command is set based on the backup information. By transmitting these effect commands to the effect control device 124 in the subsequent sub-command transmission process (step S144), the effect control device 124 is in the effect state (for example, being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown) The internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the working memory number, the sound output content, the light emission state of various lamps, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S130: The main control CPU 72 executes input port processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 acquires the contents of each input port, and stores the result of performing a predetermined calculation on the value in the status flag of each input port. When this processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S131 (out-of-page connector A → A).

Step S131: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to reset the main command permission signal (communication permission signal). The main command permission signal is a signal that can be individually set by the main control CPU 72 (main controller 70) and the payout control CPU 94 (payout controller 92).
The main controller 70 and the payout controller 92 are connected by two lines, the first line is a line for signals, and the second line is a line for commands.

  For example, when the main control CPU 72 sets a main command permission signal, the payout control CPU 94 can transmit a command. On the other hand, when the payout control CPU 94 sets a main command permission signal, the main control CPU 72 can transmit a command.

  Here, since the main control CPU 72 is executing a process of resetting the main command permission signal, the payout control CPU 94 is in a state where the command cannot be transmitted.

  If the payout command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side is not reset, the main control device 70 can transmit a command. However, since the payout command (prize ball command) is not generated during the setting change or setting reference, the payout control device 92 does not pay out the game ball. When the main command permission signal can be set in the payout control device 92, the payout command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side may be a main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side.

  Here, when the main command permission signal on the main control device 70 side is reset, the payout control device 92 causes a communication error. In order to avoid a communication error, a method of communicating with the payout control device 92 and transmitting a command indicating that the setting is being changed may be employed.

An advantage of adopting a method that does not set the main command permission signal on the main control device 70 side and does not communicate with the payout control device 92 is that there is no need to change the software of the payout control device 92.
The game ball can be prevented from being fired by resetting the firing permission signal.

  In the present embodiment, the main command permission signal is described as being a signal that can be independently set by the main control CPU 72 (main control device 70) and the payout control CPU 94 (payout control device 92). The command permission signal can be set by only the main controller 70, and can be a signal that can not be set by the payout control device 92. In this case, the payout control device 92 uses a payout command permission signal (communication permission signal) instead of the main command permission signal. Then, when the payout control device 92 sets the payout command permission signal, the main control device 70 becomes ready to send a command to the payout control device 92, and the payout control device 92 resets the payout command permission signal. As a result, the main control unit 70 can not transmit a command to the payout control unit 92.

  Step S131a: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H”, or “03H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S132 without executing step S131b. On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S131 b.

  Step S131 b: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a main command permission signal to a specific bit of the output port. As a result, the payout control device 92 can transmit a command to the main control device 70. As a result, if the setting is not being changed or the setting is being referred to, the game balls can be paid out.

  By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 sets a predetermined prohibition state during setting change or during setting reference (during execution of setting-related processing), thereby allowing the payout control device 92 to store game balls. It is possible to execute the prohibition process not to execute the payout (prohibition process execution means).

  The payout control device 92 transmits a payout activation command (activation command) to the main control device 70 and receives the activation confirmation command in response to the payout activation command, so that the payment can be made, and from the main control device 70 in the dispensable state. The game balls are paid out based on the payout command sent.

  Further, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 prohibits the payout start command from being sent from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70 by setting a predetermined prohibition state. The payout control device 92 can be prohibited from being ready for payout, and the payout control device 92 can be prevented from paying out game balls (prohibition processing execution means).

  Further, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 sets a main command permission signal (communication permission signal) on the main control device 70 side to OFF (communication not permitted), so that a predetermined prohibited state ( The main command permission signal on the main control apparatus 70 side can be in the state of being OFF) (prohibition process execution means).

  Step S132: The main control CPU 72 resets (OFF) a specific bit of the output port to clear the emission permission signal. The release permission signal is included in the backup target at the time of power off. Therefore, when the main control device 70 (pachinko machine 1) returns to the power supply, the release permission signal is also returned to the state at the time of the power supply cutoff.

  The release enable signal is set to a specific bit (e.g., bit 0) of the specific output port buffer (e.g., buffer for output port 3) stored in the RAM 76.

  Step S133: The main control CPU 72 sets a timer interrupt cycle. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms) in the counter setting register of the timer circuit 194.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 resets the interrupt daisy chain. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the RETI instruction after backing up the head address of the main loop process to be described later as advance preparation for the interrupt process. By performing this process, it becomes possible to normally start the interrupt process that occurs thereafter, and to continue the process from the main loop process after the execution of the interrupt process.

  When the above procedure is executed in the CPU initialization process, the main control CPU 72 starts executing the main loop process in step S135. As long as the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is maintained, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the main loop process from start to finish.

  When a setting function (setting changing device 300) is added to the pachinko machine 1, the state when the power is turned on increases. At this time, the power-on state “normal recovery (power recovery)”, “RAM clear recovery (initialization)”, “setting reference mode (setting reference)”, “setting change mode ( It is necessary to divide "setting change)".

  In this embodiment, in order to divide the power-on state into four, the transition determination is performed using two input devices such as the setting key switch 302 and the RAM clear switch 304.

The transition conditions to the four states are as follows.
(1) Normal recovery RAM clear switch: OFF
Setting key switch: OFF
(2) RAM clear return RAM clear switch: ON
Setting key switch: OFF
(3) Setting reference mode RAM clear switch: OFF
Setting key switch: ON
(4) Setting change mode RAM clear switch: ON
Setting key switch: ON

  Thus, the four states can be divided by the operation of the setting key switch 302 and the RAM clear switch 304.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram showing command transmission timing of the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process.

[Main controller]
When the power is turned on, main controller 70 waits for [A01] 3.1 seconds, and [A02] determines the activation method.

  Depending on the determination of the activation method, the main controller 70 is activated by [A03] initialization (RAM clear), [A04] is activated by power recovery (restore of backup information), or [A05] is activated by setting change. Or by [A06] setting reference.

  Then, when [A03] initialization, [A04] power recovery, [A05] setting change or [A06] setting reference processing ends, the main control apparatus 70 sets the [A07] main command permission signal to ON, [A08] Transition to the normal game. After the main command permission signal is set to ON, it becomes possible to receive a command from the payout control device 92.

[Discharge control device]
When the power is turned on, the payout control device 92 performs a wait of [B01] 0.1 seconds, and executes [B02] processing at the time of power on. In the power-on process, the payout control device 92 can set the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side to ON.

  Next, the payout control device 92 sets [B03] a payout command permission signal to ON, and [B04] shifts to a start command transmission waiting state. The start command transmission waiting state is a state in which the main control device 70 waits for the main command permission signal to be set to ON, and is a state in which a command can not be transmitted to the main control device 70 ( Unable to send a command to main controller 70).

  When the main command permission signal is set to ON in the main control device 70 ([A07]), the payout control device 92 can transmit a command to the main control device 70 (main control). (C01) The payout control device 92 transmits a payout start command to the main control device 70.

The main control device 70 that has received the payout activation command transmits a [C02] activation confirmation command to the payout control device 92 as a command in response thereto.
As a result, the payout control device 92 shifts to [B05] normal game state, and enters a state in which game balls can be paid out.

  During setting change or setting reference, since the game can be stopped, the command transmission from the payout control device 92 is desired to be prohibited.

  In order to prohibit the command transmission from the payout control device 92 during setting change or setting reference, the following method is adopted in the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process. The commands transmitted from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70 are classified as follows.

(1) Disbursement start command (confirmation of dispensation operation permission)
(2) Error related command (notice of error related to payout (full error, failure error, etc.) by the effect control device)

The operation of the main controller 70 when receiving each command is as follows.
(3) After receiving the command (1), the main control device 70 returns a payout operation permission command (startup confirmation command) to the payout control device 92.
(4) After receiving the command of (2), an error command is sent to the effect control device 124.

Here, although there is no problem even if the above (4) is executed, there is a possibility that the above (3) may perform a payout operation during setting change or setting reference.
Therefore, in order not to perform the above (3), a method of using the “main command permission signal” and not performing command transmission is adopted.

The usage method of the main command permission signal is as follows.
The payout control device 92 confirms the “main command permission signal” on the main control device 70 side before transmitting the command. The “main command permission signal” on the main controller 70 side is a signal indicating a command receivable state of the main controller 70.
In the present embodiment, during setting change or setting reference, the “main command permission signal” is set to the OFF state on the main control unit 70 side, and the state in which the payout control unit 92 does not perform command transmission is created.

  In the main control device 70, only by setting the main command permission signal to OFF, the payment can not be performed, and no software correction is required for the payout control device 92 side. Further, the main control device 70 side can be designed without considering that command reception occurs during setting change or setting reference.

13 and 14 are flowcharts showing a second procedure example of the CPU initialization process.
The difference between the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process and the second procedure example of the CPU initialization process is that step S131 to step S131b of FIG. 11 are changed to step S181 to step S181b of FIG. is there. The out-of-page connector is also changed to B.
Therefore, in the following description, step S181 to step S181 b of FIG. 14 will be described, and description of the other points will be omitted.

  Step S181: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a main command permission signal (communication permission signal) in a specific bit of the output port. As a result, the payout control device 92 can transmit a command to the main control device 70.

  Step S181a: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H” or “03H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S181b. On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S132.

  Step S181 b: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a payout operation stop command. When the payout control device 92 receives the payout operation stop command, the payout control device 92 is in a state where the game ball cannot be paid out. In this case, the payout control device 92 may shift to a state where a command cannot be transmitted to the main control device 70.

The payout operation stop command is transmitted in the timer interrupt process after shifting to the main loop process.
Even during the setting change or the setting change, the timer interrupt process is executed, but a processing route different from the normal game is executed. This also applies to the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process.
The payout operation start command can be set in the power supply restoration initialization process (CPU initialization process) at the time of power supply restoration or the initialization process (CPU initialization process) at the time of the RAM clear.
When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 executes step S132.

  By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 issues a payout operation stop command for prohibiting the payout control device 92 from paying out game balls during setting change or setting reference (during execution of setting-related processing). By transmitting (prohibition command), it is possible to execute the prohibition process not to make the payout control device 92 execute the payout of the game ball (prohibition process execution means).

  The payout control device 92 transmits a payout activation command (activation command) to the main control device 70, and by receiving the activation confirmation command for the payout activation command, the non-disbursement state shifts to the dispensable state, and the dispensable state The game balls are paid out based on the payout command transmitted from the main control device 70 in.

  Further, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 sends the payout operation stop command (prohibition command) to the payout control device 92 to shift the payout control device 92 to the non-disbursable state, It is possible to prevent the payout control device 92 from paying out game balls (prohibition processing execution means).

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing command transmission timing of the second procedure example of the CPU initialization process.
The dotted line in the figure indicates the time when the timer interrupt is possible.

[Main controller]
When the power is turned on, main controller 70 waits [D01] for 3.1 seconds, and [D02] determines the activation method.

Depending on the judgment of the activation method, main controller 70 is activated by [D03] initialization (RAM clear) or activated by [D04] power recovery (restoration of backup information), [D05] main command permission Set the signal to ON. After the main command permission signal is set to ON, a command from the payout control device 92 can be received.
Further, depending on the determination of the activation method, the main controller 70 is activated by [D06] setting change or [D07] by setting reference.

  When the processing of [D03] initialization, [D04] power recovery, [D06] setting change or [D07] setting reference is completed, the main controller 70 shifts to [D08] normal game.

  [D08] In the normal game, the main control device 70 becomes capable of executing the timer interrupt process, and in the timer interrupt process, [D09] setting change, [D10] setting reference or [D11] the process related to the normal game To be executed.

[Payout control device]
When the power is turned on, the payout control device 92 waits for [E01] 0.1 second, and executes [E02] power-on processing. In the power-on process, the payout control device 92 can set the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side to ON.

  Next, the payout control device 92 sets [E03] a payout command permission signal to ON, and shifts to [E04] start command transmission waiting state. The start command transmission waiting state is a state in which the main control device 70 waits for the main command permission signal to be set to ON, and is a state in which a command can not be transmitted to the main control device 70 ( Unable to send a command to main controller 70).

  [F01] The main control device 70 checks the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side, and if the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side is set to ON, Send a start command.

  When the main command permission signal is set to ON in the main control device 70 ([D05]), the payout control device 92 is ready to transmit a command to the main control device 70 (main control). [F02] The payout control device 92 transmits a payout start command to the main control device 70. Note that there is a possibility that the order of [F01] start command transmission and [F02] payout start command transmission will be reversed.

  The main control device 70 that has received the payout activation command transmits a [F03] activation confirmation command to the payout control device 92 as a command in response thereto. As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state in which the game balls can be paid out.

  [F04] When the main control device 70 is activated by setting change or setting reference ([D06] or [D07]), the main control device 70 transmits a payout operation stop command to the payout control device 92. As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state in which the game balls can not be paid out.

[F05] The main control device 70 transmits a payout operation start command to the payout control device 92 when the processing related to the setting change or the setting reference ends. As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state in which the game balls can be paid out.
Then, the payout control device 92 shifts to the [E05] normal gaming state.

  [E05] In the normal game, the payout control device 92 becomes capable of executing the timer interrupt process, and among the timer interrupt process, [E06] waiting for payout permission or [E07] a process relating to the normal game is executed.

  [G01] In the payout control device 92, the payout operation is disabled for 5 seconds after receiving the activation confirmation command. Therefore, by receiving the dispensing operation stop command during that time, the payout of the payout control device 92 is prohibited. That is, for a moment, the payout is permitted, but since there is a wait of 5 seconds, the game ball is not paid out during this period. Since the payout operation stop command is transmitted before the 5-second wait ends, the game ball is not paid out. Then, in this state, setting change or setting reference is performed. Note that, for the payout operation start command, a weight of 2 seconds is set after reception.

As described above, the payout control device 92 shifts from the payout impossible state to the payable state after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the activation confirmation command (after 5 seconds have elapsed and after the time G01 has elapsed).
Then, main controller 70 transmits a dispensing operation stop command (prohibition command) before a predetermined time elapses (before 5 seconds, before G01) after transmitting the start confirmation command, and the payout control device 92 Restricts the transition from the non-disbursable state to the dispensable state (prohibition process execution means).

  Since the game can be stopped while the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to, the payout operation of the payout control device 92 is prohibited.

  During setting change or setting reference, in order to inhibit the dispensing operation of the dispensing control device 92, the second procedure example of the CPU initialization processing adopts the following method. The commands transmitted from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70 are classified as follows.

(1) Disbursement start command (confirmation of dispensation operation permission)
(2) Error related command (informing control device of error related to payout)

The operation of the main controller 70 when receiving each command is as follows.
(3) After receiving the command (1), the main control device 70 returns a payout operation permission command (startup confirmation command) to the payout control device 92.
(4) After receiving the command of (1), an error command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Here, although there is no problem even if the above (4) is executed, there is a possibility that the above (3) may perform a payout operation during setting change or setting reference.
Therefore, before the game ball is actually paid out after the start confirmation command of (3) is sent, a "setting change / reference start command" is sent to the payout control device 92, and the payout control device 92 sends the game ball. Adopt a method to prevent payment.

The operation of the payout control device 92 after receiving the setting change / reference start command is as follows.
The payout control device 92 that has received the setting change / reference start command is in a payout stop state. The cancellation of the delivery stop state is triggered by a setting change / reference end command.

Here, “setting change / reference start command” and “setting change / reference end command” may be prepared as new commands, but “payout operation start command” and “payout operation stop command” may be used. it can.
In this case, “setting change / reference start command” = “payout operation stop command” and “setting change / reference end command” = “payout operation start command”.

  Thereby, unintended payout can be prevented during setting change or setting reference, and the software correction of the payout control device 92 becomes unnecessary by using the “dispense operation start command” and the “dispense operation stop command”. .

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the main loop process. Each procedure will be described below.
In the main loop processing, the following three types of interrupts are waited for while updating random numbers (such as random number mixing).
(1) Serial communication reception interrupt (at the time of command reception from the payout control device)
(2) Timer interrupt (when timer time-out occurs once in 4 ms)
(3) Interruption at power off notice (during input voltage drop due to power off)
And most of the processing related to the game is executed by the timer interrupt processing.

Step S141: The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt prohibition process.
Step S142: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, the jackpot determined random number (hardware random number) and various random numbers excluding the hit determined random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the normal symbol (for example, the jackpot symbol random number for determining the winning type, reach determination) Random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) are generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another timer interrupt process (step S205 in FIG. 22), but in this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all I do not have to change the random number).

  The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S142, the initial value update random number is updated. In this process, the initial value of the jackpot symbol random number is updated. The reason for executing step S142 after inhibiting the interrupt in step S141 is to execute the same process even in another timer interrupt process (step S205 in FIG. 22), thereby preventing duplication (conflict) with this. It is for. The big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number circuit 75, and the update cycle is faster (for example, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). There is no need to update the decision random number and the initial value of the hit decision random number.

  Step S143: The main control CPU 72 executes main command analysis processing. In this process, when there is a command from the payout control device 92 saved by the serial communication reception interrupt, the data received from the payout control device 92 is analyzed, and a process according to the result is performed. Specifically, when the received main command is a payout start designation command, the main control CPU 72 outputs a payout start confirmation designation command to the payout command buffer, whereas when the received main command is not the payout start designation command, the received main command is If it is out of the range after confirming whether it is a value within the specified range (if it is an appropriate value as a main command), a payout error designation command is output to the subcommand transmission buffer, and the payout radio wave is further according to the situation. Set the error flag.

  Step S144: The main control CPU 72 executes a subcommand transmission process. In this process, when an untransmitted subcommand (effect command) remains in the subcommand transmission buffer, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to store the subcommand stored in the subcommand transmission buffer. Send

  Step S145: The main control CPU 72 executes a performance display monitor aggregation division process. This processing is processing outside the area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of calculating a base to be displayed on the performance display monitor 200. In this process, the main control CPU 72 uses the division task to play the number of winning balls to be paid out by the game ball entering each winning opening (start winning opening, normal winning opening, big winning opening). A base is calculated by dividing by the number of outs (the number of game balls detected by the out switch) indicating the number of game balls launched in the area (base calculation means, base related process execution means). The performance display monitor aggregation division process is a base related process.

  The base related process is a process related to control of the base, and includes at least one of a base calculation process performed when calculating the base or a base display process performed when displaying the base on the performance display monitor 200.

Here, there is no need to clearly distinguish between the base calculation process and the base display process, the process that focuses on the base calculation is the base calculation process, and the process that focuses on the base display is the base display. It is a process. Therefore, part of the base calculation process may be regarded as part of the base display process, and part of the base display process may be regarded as part of the base calculation process.
Details of the performance display monitor totaling division process will be described later.

  Steps S146 and S147: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers.

  These series of processes are performed in the remaining time when an interrupt request is generated during execution of the main loop process and the main control CPU 72 executes various interrupt processes.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the contents of processing executed when a serial communication reception interrupt occurs.
If a serial communication reception interrupt has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a serial communication reception interrupt process (step S136). The serial communication reception interrupt occurs when a command from the payout control device 92 is received.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the contents of processing executed when a timer interrupt occurs.
When a timer interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 executes a timer interrupt process (step S137). The timer interrupt occurs at one timer time-up in a timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms).

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the contents of a process that is executed when an interrupt occurs at a power-down notice.
When the power interruption notice interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption notice interrupt process (step S138). The power down notice interrupt occurs when the input voltage drops due to power down.

As for the priority of the interrupt, “serial communication reception interrupt” is “high”, “timer interrupt” is “medium”, and “power interruption notice interrupt” is “low”.
Therefore, if "serial communication reception interrupt" is generated while "timer interrupt" is generated and "timer interrupt processing" is being executed, "serial communication reception interrupt processing" unless interrupt is inhibited. Run.
On the other hand, even if a “timer interrupt” occurs and a “timer interrupt process” is being executed, even if a “power interruption notice interrupt” occurs, the “power interruption notice interrupt process” is executed at that time. Without performing the "timer interruption processing", the "power interruption notice processing" is executed.

When various interrupt processes such as serial communication reception interrupt process (main command reception interrupt process) and timer interrupt process are completed, the process returns to the interrupt source (program address indicated by the stack pointer).
Since the interrupt process at the time of power-off notice is a special process, it does not return to the interrupt source in principle. Normally, after save processing (checksum calculation, RWM (RAM) access protection, etc.), the occurrence of reset due to voltage drop is awaited on the spot. When the power supply is restored midway, the process returns to the beginning of the program (for example, CPU initialization processing). Note that there is also a case where it returns to the interrupt source at the beginning of the process, but this is an exceptional process.

[Serial communication reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of serial communication reception interrupt processing.
The serial communication reception interrupt process is executed when a command is received from the payout control device 92. The payout control device 92 transmits, to the main control device 70, a command for payout start designation indicating that the game has been started, and various devices (for example, the payout device substrate 100 or the The relay transmission of the command (error command etc.) transmitted to the main control apparatus 70 from the full tank switch 161 etc.) is performed. These commands transmitted by the payout control device 92 are received by the reception data register of the specific channel of the serial communication circuit 196 of the main control device 70. The main control CPU 72 executes serial communication reception interrupt processing (SCU interrupt processing) triggered by this command reception (SCU interrupt). Hereinafter, each procedure of the serial communication reception interrupt process will be described.

  Step S180: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the A register (accumulator) and F register (flag register) used during the execution of the main loop processing in the save area of the RAM 76. After the values are saved, different values can be written to the respective registers during execution of the data reception interrupt process.

  Step S182: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a reception error. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checks a specific bit of the status register to check whether or not there is data in the reception data register (reception FIFO). If there is data, it is normal data. Make sure. Then, if there is no data, or if there is data but not normal data, the main control CPU 72 determines that there is a reception error.

  If it is determined that the error is a reception error (Yes), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S184. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error is not a reception error (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S184.

  Step S184: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for storing the received command (main command) in the buffer (received command buffer). The stored main command is analyzed in the main command analysis process of the main loop process.

  This process is a process of rewriting the buffer of the use area of the RAM 76. For this reason, if a serial communication reception interrupt occurs during execution of processing related to the out-of-area, the buffer in the used area will be rewritten despite execution of processing related to the out-of-area. There is a possibility that the gaming machine rules will be violated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when executing the serial communication reception interrupt process, the serial communication reception interrupt process is executed after the interrupt is prohibited (after the serial communication reception interrupt is prohibited).

  Steps S186 and S188: The main control CPU 72 restores the values of the A and F registers saved in step S180 to each register, and after permitting an interrupt, terminates the serial communication reception interrupt process and performs the main loop process (FIG. 16). Return to the interrupt source of).

[Interrupt processing at power-off notice]
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the power-off notice interrupt process.
The power-off notice interrupt process is executed when a power-off (hereinafter, abbreviated as “power-off”) occurs.
In the main control device 70, the occurrence of the power-off and the occurrence of the reset are monitored by the same monitoring IC (for example, an IC mounted on a reset controller not shown). This monitoring IC monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162, and outputs a power-off notice signal to the XINT terminal of the parallel I / O port 79 when the voltage level falls below the reference voltage. The main control CPU 72 executes a power-off notice interrupt process (XINT interrupt process) triggered by the input of a power-off notice signal to the XINT terminal (XINT interrupt).

  Steps S151 and S152: The main control CPU 72 reads the power-off detection switch input port of the parallel I / O port 79, checks a specific bit, and confirms whether or not the power-off notice signal is detected. If it is not possible to confirm that the power-off notice signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 ends the power-off notice interrupt process and returns to the interrupt source of the main loop process (FIG. 16). On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the power-off notice signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S153.

  Step S153: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing all output ports. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, and the second big prize opening solenoid 97. Clear the output port buffer.

  The process of step S153 is a process that is executed when the determination in step S152 is affirmative (Yes) or when the setting change is completed (by the execution of step S330 in FIG. 27).

  Step S154: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calculating and storing the checksum. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup flag and the checksum buffer in the backup target area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. When the calculation of the sum is completed for all areas, the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the checksum buffer.

  Step S155: The main control CPU 72 stores a valid value (for example, “01”) in the backup flag area.

  Step S156: The main control CPU 72 executes a RAM (RWM) access prohibition process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 stores “00H” representing the access prohibition as the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits the access to the work area (including the used area and the outside area) of the RAM 76.

Step S157: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the power-off notice signal has been detected. The method of confirming the power-off notice signal is the same as the method in step S152 described above.
When it is confirmed that the power-off notice signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S157 again. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the power-off notice signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S158.

  Step S158: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms) has elapsed in a state (off state) in which the power-off notice signal is not detected. When it is confirmed that the predetermined time has elapsed in the state where the power-off notice signal is not detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the beginning of the program. Since a program related to the CPU initialization process is disposed at the beginning of the program, returning to the beginning of the program means executing the CPU initialization process. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the predetermined time has elapsed without detecting the power-off notice signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S157 and repeats the processing so far. By executing such a process, when the power supply is restored (the power-off notice signal is turned off continuously for 10 ms), it is possible to return to the beginning of the program of the power-off notice upon interruption processing.

  Further, the processes in steps S157 and S158 are standby processes that are executed in preparation for the interruption of the power supply from the power supply control unit 162. If the power-off notice signal is continuously detected, step S157 and step S158 are repeatedly executed, so the standby state is continued as long as the power supply is sustained. In this manner, the main control CPU 72 first calculates the checksum and saves the result before entering the standby mode after the power supply is completely cut off, and in the situation where the power supply is being shut off Keeping the standby state without executing the process, the power supply coming off in a safe state is cut off (the reset is awaited due to a voltage drop).

  When the power supply from the power control unit 162 is cut off, the power supply source to the main control device 70 is automatically switched to the backup power source. The main controller 70 is supplied with backup power from a backup power supply circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70) after the power interruption occurs. The contents of the memory are retained without loss even after power-off. The backup power supply circuit may be built in the power supply control unit 162.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum addition target) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the power is turned off. Further, the stored storage is restored as backup information at the time of the occurrence of the power-off, after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous CPU initialization processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of timer interrupt processing.
The main control CPU 72 executes timer interrupt processing (PTC interrupt processing) every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request (PTC interrupt) output by the timer circuit 194. Hereinafter, each procedure of the timer interrupt process will be described.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the AF register (accumulator and flag register pair), BC, DE, and HL register (pair of general-purpose registers) used during execution of the main loop processing in the RAM 76. Evacuate to Another value can be written to each register after the value is saved during the execution of the timer interrupt process.

  Step S201: The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt flag initialization process. In this process, a process for clearing the timer interrupt flag (= 0) is executed. The timer interrupt flag is cleared because the timer interrupt occurs at a predetermined timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms), but the timer interrupt flag is set (= 1) at a predetermined timer interrupt cycle. Note that when the timer interrupt flag is set, generation of a timer interrupt is not permitted.

  Step S201a: The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt permission process. When the interrupt is permitted here, another interrupt can be generated while the subsequent step of the timer interrupt process is executed.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes dynamic port output processing. In this process, in order to control lighting of each of the lamps mounted on the integrated display substrate 89 and the performance display monitor 200 by a dynamic lighting method, port output in common unit is performed. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port and then outputs the generated common output data to the common port output buffer corresponding to the selected common. The output contents are the contents set by the previous timer interrupt.

  Here, every time the timer interrupt process occurs, the data output to the port output buffer for each common is sequentially output to the common port one by one in this dynamic port output process. For example, the data stored for common 1 is output to the port in the next timer interrupt processing, and the data stored for common 2 is output to the port in the next timer interrupt processing. Data stored in each common port output buffer is sequentially processed one by one. As a result, the lamps that make up a predetermined display mode (modes that display and change the display of symbols, display the number of working memories, display the game status, etc.) and the performance display monitor are driven sequentially in common units, and the dynamic lighting system Lighting control is performed by.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes port input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 calculates the logic between the input value of various switch signals from the parallel I / O port 79 and the inversion result value of the previous input value in order to accurately acquire the latest switch state based on the input port information. Store the product in the input port on detection flag. As a result, by the value (ON / OFF) of the input port on detection flag, it becomes possible to grasp an accurate input state based on the change from the previous time of various switch signals. Various switch signals include the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right start winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, the first 2 includes a winning detection signal from the winning opening switch 81, a detection signal from a fraud detection switch (not shown) (magnetic detection switch, radio wave detection switch, vibration detection switch, etc.) and the like.

  Step S204: The main control CPU 72 executes a timer update process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72, in addition to various timers (timers for managing the fluctuation time / stop time of the symbol, the open time / close time of the motorized part, etc.) used for the game, various timers for external information, security signal A process (subtraction process etc.) for updating a counter such as a timer is executed.

  Step S205: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value random number update process. The content of the process is the same as the initial value random number update process (step S142 in FIG. 16) of the main loop process.

  Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning symbol random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery of special symbols and ordinary symbols. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

  Step S206a: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H”, or “03H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S206b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S207.

  The reason why such a determination process is being performed is to prevent the process relating to the normal game from being executed when the setting is being changed and the setting is being referred to. And, during the setting change or setting reference, by not executing the processing related to the normal game in the timer interrupt processing, the load of the program of the main control device 70 can be reduced.

  Step S206b: The main control CPU 72 executes setting change processing. By executing this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a setting-related process including at least one of a setting change process executed when changing the setting or a setting reference process executed when referring to the setting. (Setting related processing execution means). The details of the process will be described later. The setting-related processing includes processing executed during setting change or setting reference. When the setting change process is finished, the main control CPU 72 executes step S217a. The reason for shifting to step S217a is to output an external signal (security signal) in the external information management process.

  By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 may restrict the execution of at least a part of the other process during the execution of one of the setting-related process and the base-related process. Yes (restriction means). That is, when the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (step S206a; Yes), the main control CPU 72 does not execute at least a part of the base related processing (steps S207 to S217, in particular, step S208). can do.

  Step S207: The main control CPU 72 executes switch management processing. In this process, the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right start winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 among the switch signals input in the previous port input processing (step S203). The event occurring during the game is determined based on the winning detection signal from the first winning port switch 86 and the second winning port switch 81, and the process corresponding to each event is executed. The details of the process will be described later.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. In addition, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred.

  Step S208: The main control CPU 72 executes addition number calculation processing (base related processing execution means). The addition number calculation process is a base related process. This processing is processing of the used area. In this process, the main control CPU 72, the game state, each switch (out switch 99, middle start winning opening switch 80, right start winning opening switch 82, first winning opening switch 86, second winning opening switch 81, the first Check the status of the count switch 84, the second count switch 85, etc.) and use the “value to be added to the RAM outside the area (number of prize balls generated during 4 ms, number of outs, etc.)” for base calculation. Calculate Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining values of the number of shot balls A (normal out addition number), the number of shot balls B (total out addition number), and the number of acquired balls (ordinary prize ball addition number). Do. The details of the process will be described later.

  Step S209, Step S210: The main control CPU 72 executes special game management processing and normal game management processing. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1.

  In the special game management process (step S209), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device. The variable display or stop display by 35 is determined, or the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the process will be described later.

  In the normal game management process (step S210), the main control CPU 72 determines the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33, and controls the operation of the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Do. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (determined random number per normal symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch management process (step S207), and in this normal game management process A random number value is read from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range. When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. It excites and operates the variable start winning device 28. On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs the stop display of the normal symbol in the form of the offset after the fluctuation display.

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes state management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 collects an abnormality in the winning frequency (a state in which the number of balls entering the middle start winning opening 26 and the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is abnormally large) or a base abnormality (behind the game board unit 8). The number of game balls that have been played, ie, the number of game balls that have been driven into the game area 8a is such that the total number of winning balls at each of the winning openings 22, 24, 26, 28a, 30b, 31b is greater). Check if it has occurred. When an error state is detected, the main control CPU 72 indicates that an abnormality has occurred due to the output of a security signal to the hall computer of the amusement hall and the transmission of a predetermined error command to the effect control device 124. To notify. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may execute an error process related to door opening and fraud detection (magnet, radio wave, vibration, etc.).

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning opening switch process. In this process, when each input port on detection flag stored based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous port input process (step S203) is ON, Each target winning ball control counter is incremented by one and updated.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first checks whether or not the payout command buffer is not empty (a payout command to be transmitted is set), and if not empty (a payout command is set), the payout command. The various payout commands output to the buffer are transmitted to the payout control device 92. For example, a payout command indicating a start mode at the time of power-on is set in the process of the CPU initialization process, is output to the payout command buffer, and a payout command indicating the start mode is transmitted in this process. On the other hand, if the payout command buffer is empty, the process proceeds to a process for instructing payout of the winning ball. The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the prize ball control counter is 0, and if the prize ball control counter is not 0, the prize control device 92 issues a prize ball designation payout command for instructing the number of prize balls corresponding to this counter. Send to More specifically, prize ball designation payout commands corresponding to each prize ball control counter are transmitted in this process. Note that the payout command is transmitted by a payout command permission signal input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and the number of payout commands set in the transmission data register (transmission FIFO) is a predetermined number. If it is less than this (more specifically, if the dispensing command set in the transmission FIFO has already been transmitted, or if it is currently being transmitted and the transmission FIFO has an empty space), it is executed.

  In particular, when the power is turned on, if the payout command set in the process of the CPU initialization process is normally transmitted, the main control CPU 72 turns on the firing permission signal in response to this. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the payout command buffer output when the power is turned on, and turns on the firing permission signal by setting a specific bit of the output port. Thereby, after confirming the normal operation after power-on, the launch of the game ball is permitted, and this launch permission signal is sent to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, so that the game ball can be launched. State.

  Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the contents of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the payout control management process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, the first profit (for example, 15 game balls) Generate a corresponding prize ball content command. Note that generating a command means storing the command in a subcommand transmission buffer (the same applies hereinafter). In addition, when the winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, a winning ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for example, 10 game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16) of the main loop process.

[About the number of prize balls and number of game balls won]
The number of winning balls of the starting opening of the first special symbol and the number of winning balls of the starting opening of the second special symbol are respectively set to one or more specified numbers. In addition, the number of prize balls may be different between the start port of the first special symbol and the start port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of acquired game balls (average number of balls obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time saving state), the lowest winning ball number is set You may Furthermore, the probability of winning special symbols, the expected value of the total number of acquired game balls, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings of the big winning opening, and the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. When the condition is satisfied, a big hit may be set such that the number of game balls acquired by one big hit is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

  Step S215: The main control CPU 72 executes a test signal management process. This process can be a process outside the region. In this process, the main control CPU 72 is in its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, launch position designation state, big hit, small hit, probability variation function is activated, time reduction function is activated, etc. ) Are generated and stored in the port output request buffer. By means of this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

  Step S216: The main control CPU 72 executes an LED display setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The process which produces | generates the data for common output for carrying out lighting control of LED contained in the symbol operation | movement memory lamp 35a, the game state display apparatus 38, etc. is performed. The processing related to the performance display monitor 200 is executed in the performance display monitor control processing.

  More specifically, the main control CPU 72 is based on the symbol change display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc. determined in the special game management process (step S209) or the normal game management process (step S210). Thus, a drive signal for lighting each lamp in a corresponding manner is generated as common output data.

  Step S217: The main control CPU 72 executes a solenoid data setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 causes the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first grand prize opening solenoid 90, and the second major prize generated in the special game management process (step S209) and the normal game management process (step S210). The drive signals of the port solenoid 97, test signals and the like are combined (combined) and stored in the port output buffer. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 executes solenoid data port output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a value is stored in each output buffer (port output buffer), and outputs a port if a value is stored. For example, the drive signal of each solenoid 88, 90, 97 stored in the port output buffer is port-outputted. In this case, each drive signal is transmitted to the corresponding solenoid 88, 90, 97, and each solenoid executes an operation according to the drive signal.

Step S217a: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an external information management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends an external information signal to the hall computer of the game arcade through the external terminal board 160 (for example, winning ball information, door opening information, symbol determination frequency information, big hit information, starting opening information, security signal, etc.) In the port output request buffer.
In the external information management process, an external signal (security signal) is output when “setting change or setting reference is in progress”.

  In this embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Various jackpot information can be provided (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit Or can recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened state of the symbol variation time. In this external information management process, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S218: The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt prohibition process.

  Step S218a: The main control CPU 72 executes register save processing.

  Step S219: The main control CPU 72 executes performance display monitor control processing (base related processing execution means). The performance display monitor control process is a base related process. This process is a process outside the area. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 executes processing such as switching of the display content of the performance display monitor 200, or the value of the base calculated in the performance display monitor aggregation division processing of the main loop processing (step S145 in FIG. 16). A process of generating a drive signal for displaying on the performance display monitor 200 as data for common output is executed. Details of the process will be described later.

  Step S219a: The main control CPU 72 executes register restoration processing. As a result, the register value saved in the process of step S218a is restored.

Step S220: The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt permission process. When the interrupt is permitted here, another interrupt can be generated while the subsequent step of the timer interrupt process is executed. As described above, in the timer interrupt process, multiple interrupts are permitted.
Note that acceptance of an interrupt request signal, priority control of multiple interrupts, and the like are executed by the interrupt controller 192.

  Step S221: The main control CPU 72 executes a launch position management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining the launch position of the gaming ball according to the progress of the game (launch position determination means). In addition, this processing may be executed in the special game management processing. Details of the process will be described later.

  Step S222: The main control CPU 72 restores the values of the HL, DE, BC, and AF registers saved in step S200 to each register, ends the timer interrupt process, and returns to the main loop process of the CPU initialization process.

[Interrupt management by interrupt controller]
In main controller 70, an XINT interrupt (interrupt request output from parallel I / O port 79 which is the source of interrupt processing upon power-off notice) is executed during execution of the CPU initialization process which is the main control program, SCU interrupt (Interrupt request output by serial communication circuit 196 that is the source of serial communication reception interrupt processing) and PTC interrupt (interrupt request output by timer circuit 194 that is the source of timer interrupt processing) can occur. These interrupt requests are managed and controlled by the interrupt controller 192 installed in the main controller 70. The interrupt controller 192 performs control (so-called maskable interrupt control) that permits acceptance of an interrupt request by an interrupt permission instruction (EI instruction) of the main control CPU 72 and prohibits acceptance of an interrupt request by an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). ing.

  Since the XINT interrupt, the SCU interrupt, and the PTC interrupt all occur on the basis of independent generation factors having no interdependence, it is naturally conceivable that a plurality of interrupt requests occur simultaneously. Therefore, the interrupt controller 192 controls each interrupt request according to a predetermined priority order of interrupt requests in consideration of the importance of interrupt processing, processing efficiency, and the like.

  More specifically, the priority of interrupt requests (interrupt processing) is defined in the interrupt vector table, the XINT interrupt (interrupt processing at power-off notice) has the lowest priority, and the PTC interrupt (timer interrupt processing) The priority is the next highest, and the priority of the SCU interrupt (serial communication reception interrupt processing) is set to the highest (see FIGS. 17 to 19).

  By setting the interrupt vector table at the beginning of the CPU initialization process, the interrupt controller 192 can perform priority control of interrupt requests generated at subsequent timings. Actually, if any interrupt request occurs after the CPU initialization process transitions to the main loop process and after the interrupt is permitted until the interrupt is prohibited, the interrupt controller 192 displays the accepted interrupt request. Control based on the priority set in the interrupt vector table. For example, when an XINT interrupt and a PTC interrupt are received simultaneously, a higher priority PTC interrupt (timer interrupt processing) is processed first. While the timer interrupt process is being executed, the XINT interrupt waits for an interrupt, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the XINT interrupt (interrupt process upon power-off notice) is executed.

  By controlling the interrupt request based on the priority in this manner, the interrupt controller 192 can execute multiple interrupts in the main controller 70.

[Dynamic port output processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the dynamic port output process. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S160: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the output port 0. Thereby, the display of the main display is cleared. The output port 0 is a port for outputting data related to the main display.

  Step S161: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the output port 2. Thereby, the display of the performance display monitor 200 is cleared. The output port 2 is a port for outputting data related to the performance display monitor 200.

  The reason why the processing in steps S160 and S161 is performed is that in the case of the dynamic lighting method, if the display is not erased, the control processing may run away when referring to the common data.

  In addition, after the process of step S160 and step S161, the process of waiting for blanking time end can be performed. With this waiting time, the display data can be erased and the data can be output after a certain time has elapsed. This waiting time is also a waiting time for avoiding a control process runaway. During the waiting time, the following steps S162 and S163 may be executed.

  Step S162: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of updating the common counter in the range of 0 to 3. As a result, the common number to be output is updated.

  Step S163: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of acquiring common data corresponding to the common counter. Thereby, data corresponding to the common to be output can be acquired.

  Step S164: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting common data to the output port 1. By outputting the common data to the output port 1, the common data can be output while switching the common. The output port 1 is a port that outputs data specifying a common number (common 0 to 3) corresponding to the common counter.

  Step S165: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for acquiring display data corresponding to the common counter. Display data is stored in the RAM of the use area.

  The display data to be acquired is roughly divided into two data. The first data is data for the main display, and the second data is data for the performance display monitor 200.

  Data for the first main display is generated as common output data in the LED display setting process (FIG. 61).

  The data for the second performance display monitor 200 may be generated as data for displaying the base in the performance display monitor display process (step S646) of the performance display monitor control process (FIG. 65). In some cases, it is generated as data for displaying a set value in steps S334 to S346 of the process (FIG. 28).

  Here, regarding the data for the second performance display monitor 200, the display data is set in the common 0 to 3 buffer both when displaying the base and when displaying the set value. Data is overwritten.

  And the process of step S169 of FIG. 23 and the process of step S173 of FIG. 24 are the same processes as the process, but when executing the process of step S169 of FIG. Since data on the setting value is stored in the buffer, the performance display monitor 200 displays the content on the setting value. On the other hand, when the process of step S173 in FIG. 24 is executed, since the data related to the base is stored in the common 0-3 common buffer, the content related to the base is displayed on the performance display monitor 200.

  Step S166: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H”, or “03H”.

  As a result, if it can not be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S167a. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S169.

  Step S167a: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting to the output port 0. Specifically, processing for setting the display on the main display is executed. As a result, the data specified by the specified common is output. The data output here is common output data generated by the LED display setting processing, and each lamp mounted on the integrated display substrate 89 by setting the common output data to the common port output buffer. Can be controlled by a dynamic lighting method.

Step S167b: The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt disabling process.
Step S167c: The main control CPU 72 executes a register save process.

  Step S168a: The main control CPU 72 executes a performance display monitor output process (base related process execution means). The performance display monitor output process is a base related process. This process is a process outside the area. Therefore, this process is performed after the interrupt disable process is performed. By executing this process, the data specified by the specified common is output. Details of the process will be described later.

  By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 can execute processing (base related processing) for displaying the base on the performance display monitor 200 as processing included in processing outside the area (second processing). Yes (second process execution means).

Step S168b: The main control CPU 72 executes a register return process.
Step S168c: The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt permission process.

  Step S169: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting to the output port 2. Specifically, a process of setting the display of the performance display monitor 200 (a process of outputting the display data acquired in the process of step S165 to the output port 2) is executed. This processing is processing of the used area. By executing this process, the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200 during setting change or setting reference. The processing other than the processing in step S168a can be processing of the used area.

  By executing such processing, during normal gaming, the buffer contents in the used area can be output to the main display, and the buffer contents outside the area can be output to the performance display monitor 200. On the other hand, while the setting is being changed and the setting is being referred to, the buffer contents in the used area can be output to the performance display monitor 200, and the main display can be cleared to display nothing.

  In the pachinko machine 1, there are cases where 7-segment LEDs are not present in the main display (when a plurality of dot LEDs are geometrically arranged). In such a situation, in order to display setting values in an easy-to-understand manner, it is necessary to use the 7-segment LED of the performance display monitor 200. At this time, there is a regular concern that the process is performed outside the area (a concern that the process is not performed in the use area even though the process is related to a game).

Since the process related to the performance display monitor 200 is permitted to be executed outside the area, basically, the display process of the performance display monitor 200 is executed outside the area.
However, among the display process of the 7-segment LED of the performance display monitor, the process of displaying the setting value is likely to be a process relating to a game, so it is executed in the use area.

  Thereby, the process of displaying the setting value on the performance display monitor 200 can be executed in the use area, and regular concern can be avoided.

  By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can execute a process of displaying the set value on the performance display monitor 200 as a process included in the process of the use area (first process) (first process). Processing execution means).

  When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

[Performance display monitor output processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the performance display monitor output process. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S170: The main control CPU 72 executes a stack pointer save process. By this process, the stack pointer of the used area is saved.

  Step S171: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting a stack pointer outside the area.

  Step S172: The main control CPU 72 executes register save processing. To save the register, a stack pointer outside the area is used.

Step S173: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting data.
Specifically, a process of setting the display of the performance display monitor 200 (a process of outputting the display data acquired in the process of step S165 in FIG. 23 to the output port 2) is executed. By executing this processing, the base is displayed on the performance display monitor 200 during the normal game.

The present process is the same process as step S169 in FIG. 23, but the contents of the data output to the output port 2 (the contents displayed on the performance display monitor 200) are different.
In this process (step S173), since data on the base is acquired in step S165 of FIG. 23, data on the base is output to the output port 2, and the content on the base is displayed on the performance display monitor 200.
On the other hand, in step S169 in FIG. 23, data relating to the setting value is acquired in step S165 in FIG. 23, so data relating to the setting value is output to the output port 2, and contents relating to the setting value are displayed on the performance display monitor 200. .

  Since the common output is executed in the process related to the use area (in order to use a common common number; see step S164 in FIG. 23), in this process, a process of outputting only data is executed. As a result, the data specified by the specified common is output. The data output here is common output data generated by the performance display monitor display processing, and the performance display monitor is set by setting the common output data (base display data) in the port output buffer for common. The lighting of each lamp mounted on 200 can be controlled by a dynamic lighting method.

  Specifically, the main control CPU 72 switches to the performance display monitor 200 by switching either the previous base or the current base at preset intervals along with the corresponding identifier "bL." Or "b6." Executes processing to set common output data to be displayed in the port output buffer. The display content on the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on the common output data (drive signal) set here.

  Step S166: The main control CPU 72 executes a register return process.

Step S167: The main control CPU 72 executes stack pointer return processing. By executing this process, after returning to the stack pointer of the used area, it returns to the process related to the used area.
When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the dynamic port output process (FIG. 23).

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the relationship between timer interrupt processing and dynamic port output processing.
The timer interrupt is an interrupt whose interrupt priority is lower than that of the serial communication reception interrupt (see FIGS. 17 to 19).
Here, bold dotted arrows in the figure indicate interrupt disabled sections (dotted arrows A1 to A3), and bold solid arrows in the figure indicate interrupt enabled sections (solid arrows B1 to B3).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a register save process (S200) and an interrupt flag initialization process (S201) are executed. This section is an interrupt disabled section (see dotted arrow A1).

  When an interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 (program, assembler) of the present embodiment automatically enters the same state as when an instruction for interrupt prohibition is used. Therefore, when the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is internally disabled (as hardware). Therefore, in order to permit an interrupt, it is necessary to execute an interrupt permitting process.

  Therefore, in the timer interrupt process, next, the interrupt permission process (S201a) is executed. By executing this processing, an interrupt permission section is started (see solid arrow B1).

  When the dynamic port output process (S202) is called from the timer interrupt process, in the dynamic port output process, a process of clearing the output port 0 and a process of clearing the output port 2 are executed (S160, S161). This section is an interrupt enabled section (see solid arrow B1).

  In the dynamic port output process, next, the interrupt prohibition process (S167b) is executed. By executing this process, the interrupt disabled section is started (see dotted arrow A2).

  In the dynamic port output process, a register save process (S167c), a performance display monitor output process (S168a), and a register return process (S168b) are further executed. This section is an interrupt disabled section (see dotted arrow A2).

  In the dynamic port output process, finally, an interrupt permission process (S168c) is executed. By executing this processing, an interrupt permission section is started (see solid arrow B2).

  The process returns from the dynamic port output process to the timer interrupt process to execute various processes. This section is an interrupt enabled section (see solid arrow B2).

In the timer interrupt process, next, the interrupt disable process (S218) is executed. By executing this process, the interrupt disabled section is started (see a dotted arrow A3).
In the timer interrupt process, a register save process (S218a), a performance display monitor control process (S219), and a register return process (S219a) are further executed. This section is an interrupt disabled section (see dotted arrow A3).

  Then, in the timer interrupt process, an interrupt permission process (S220) is executed. By executing this process, an interrupt permission section is started (see solid arrow B3).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since "serial communication reception interrupt processing" having a higher interrupt priority than "timer interrupt processing" is set, "performance display monitor control processing (S219)" and "performance display monitor output" In the process (S165), the process is executed after disabling the interrupt.

For this reason, during execution of the “performance display monitor control process (S219)” and the “performance display monitor output process (S165)”, even if a “serial communication reception interrupt” having a high interrupt priority occurs, it is not interrupted. The “performance display monitor control process (S219)” and the “performance display monitor output process (S165)” are continuously executed.
In this case, the "performance display monitor control process" and the "performance display monitor output process" are completed, and the "serial communication reception interrupt process" is executed at the timing when the interrupt is permitted. Since the reception data related to the interrupt is stored in the reception buffer, even if the timing for taking out the reception data is delayed, no problem occurs because the processing on the reception data is executed thereafter.

[Processing contents of main control CPU 72]
The main control CPU 72 executes timer interrupt processing (first processing) (first processing execution means). Further, when a serial communication reception interrupt (predetermined interrupt) occurs during the execution of the timer interrupt process, the main control CPU 72 interrupts the execution of the timer interrupt process, and the serial communication reception interrupt process (different from the timer interrupt process) 2nd process) is performed (2nd process execution means).

  The timer interrupt process (first process) includes an interrupt permitting process for permitting a serial communication reception interrupt, and an interrupt non-permission process not for permitting a serial communication reception interrupt, which is a process for monitoring the ball history.

The interrupt permission process is a process (special game management process or the like) excluding the process related to the use area, for example, the "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and the "performance display monitor output process (S165)".
The interrupt non-permission processing is processing related to the outside of the area, for example, “performance display monitor control processing (S219)” and “performance display monitor output processing (S165)”.

  When executing the interrupt non-permission process, the main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt non-permission process in a state where serial communication reception interrupts are prohibited (first process execution means).

  Further, when executing the interrupt non-permission process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for prohibiting the serial communication reception interrupt before executing the interrupt non-permission process, executes the interrupt non-permission process, and executes the interrupt non-permission process. After the execution, a process for permitting serial communication reception interruption is executed (first process execution means).

  The interrupt non-permission process is a part of the process of calculating the base. Some of the processes for calculating the base are “performance display monitor control process (S219)” and “performance display monitor output process (S165)”.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a modification of timer interrupt processing.
The timer interrupt process has been described in the order of the process shown in FIG. 22, but may be modified as follows.

  The processing order of the timer interrupt processing is as follows: [1] Dynamic port output processing, [2] Addition number calculation processing (at least winning detection and calculation of winning balls count), and [3] Performance display monitor control processing.

  [1] The reason why the dynamic port output process is given the highest priority is to make the common switching timing and the data display time constant. For this reason, [1] dynamic port output processing is performed in the first half (early stage) of timer interrupt processing.

  [2] The reason why priority is given to the calculation of the number of additions next is that in the performance display monitor control process, the number of prize balls used and the number of outs are calculated in advance within the use area. This is because it must be performed before the display monitor control process.

  [3] The reason why the performance display monitor control process is the last priority is that the performance display monitor control process needs to be executed after the addition number calculation process is completed.

  The processing to be inserted in [A], [B] or [C] in the figure is not limited to the arrangement example in FIG. 22, but any processing (input port update processing, input port edge detection processing, winning port Determination processing, special symbol processing, normal symbol processing, error processing, external output processing, test signal output processing, port output processing, and the like) can be inserted.

  At this time, the calculated base value varies depending on whether the process related to the special symbol (special game management process) is performed before or after the addition number calculation process. The reason for this is that since it is judged in the addition number calculation processing whether or not a big hit is in progress, there are cases where counting the number of outs, which is the denominator of the base value, and cases where it does not count.

  Specifically, if the processing related to the special symbol is prior to the addition number calculation processing, if the processing related to the special symbol is a big hit and an out switch is detected within one interrupt, an out switch is detected. Numbers are not counted (out switch detection is considered a jackpot and excluded from the base calculation).

  On the other hand, if the processing related to the special symbol is after the addition number calculation processing, if the processing related to the special symbol is a big hit and an out switch is detected within one interrupt, the out count is counted. (Since it has not been a big hit at the time of the addition number calculation process, the detection of the out switch is valid and is not excluded from the base calculation).

  As described above, the value of the base changes depending on whether the processing related to the special symbol is arranged before or after the addition calculation processing, but the processing related to the special symbol is a game specification or a base to be calculated. Depending on the contents of, it can be placed at any place in the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 are flowcharts showing an example procedure of setting change processing.
Step S300: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading a set value buffer. Thereby, the main control CPU 72 can obtain the current setting value.

  Step S302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S304. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S308.

  Step S304: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed. In this embodiment, since the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are used together, it is confirmed here that the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed. However, the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are used together. If the setting change switch is separately provided, it is checked in this process whether or not the setting change switch is pressed.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S306. On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S308.

  Step S306: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the set value. For example, when the setting value loaded in step S300 is “0 (setting 1)”, when this processing is executed, the setting value becomes “1 (setting 2)”. Further, when the setting value loaded in step S300 is “1 (setting 2)”, when this processing is executed, the setting value becomes “2 (setting 3)”. When the setting value loaded in step S300 is “5 (setting 6)”, when this process is executed, the setting value returns to the original value and becomes “0 (setting 1)”.

  Here, when the setting value loaded in step S300 is "5 (setting 6)", by executing this processing, the setting value is set to "6 (out of range)" without returning to the original value, and the next Processing of correcting to “0 (setting 1)” may be performed in step S308 and step S310.

  Step S308: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the set value is in the range of “0 (setting 1)” to “5 (setting 6)”. This process is a process for avoiding an unintended setting value being set.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the set value is in the range of “0 (setting 1)” to “5 (setting 6)” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S312. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the set value is in the range of “0 (setting 1)” to “5 (setting 6)” (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S310.

  Step S310: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting “0 (setting 1)”. Accordingly, when an unintended setting value is set, “0 (setting 1)” can be set.

  Step S312: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S314. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the setting is being changed and the setting is not yet confirmed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S322 (in-page connector 1 → 1).

Step S312: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the setting key has changed from ON to OFF. The main control CPU 72 can determine that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF when the input signal from the setting key switch 302 changes from ON to OFF.
The present determination process may be a process of determining whether the setting key (setting key switch 302) is OFF.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S316. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S334 (out-of-page connector C → C).

  Step S316: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting “02H (during setting change and after confirmation)” to the setting change in progress flag.

  Step S318: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a “setting confirmation designation command” as a sub command. The “setting confirmation designation command” can include information that the setting has been confirmed, and information of the setting value.

  Step S320: The main control CPU 72 executes a subcommand set process. By executing this process, the “setting confirmation designation command” is set in the subcommand transmission buffer. The set “setting confirmation designation command” is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process. When this process ends, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S332 (in-page connector 2 → 2).

  Step S322: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the setting key is ON or the inner frame is open.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting key is ON or the inner frame is open (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S332 (in-page connector 2 → 2). On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the setting key is ON or the inner frame is open (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S324.

Step S324: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of updating the inner frame closing timer.
In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value to the inner frame closing timer when the inner frame (for example, inner frame assembly 7) is closed, and then counts down the timer with the passage of time (every time this module is called). Do.

  Step S324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the inner frame closing timer has timed out. Specifically, if the value of the inner frame closing timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the inner frame closing timer has not expired (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 executes step S334 (out-of-page connector C → C).

  Thereafter, when the value of the inner frame closing timer becomes 0 with the elapse of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the inner frame closing timer has timed out (Yes), and executes step S328.

  Step S328: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the setting changing flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the setting change flag to “0”.

  Step S330: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for shifting to the process at the completion of the setting change. Specifically, the process of shifting to step S152a (step S153) of FIG. 21 is executed by the jump instruction (outside page connector “shifting to processing upon completion of setting change” → “when completion of setting change”).

  When setting change and setting reference are finished by executing such processing, the state shifts to the reset state. Specifically, the process jumps to the saving process when the power is turned off. Then, at the jump destination, after the checksum calculation, the power supply is confirmed and the program returns to the beginning (CPU initialization process). As a result, the program configuration becomes “initialization → setting change or setting reference (temporary main loop) → initialization after setting change → original main loop”, “initialization → main loop (normal game, Setting change and setting reference) ”can be simplified.

Here, when a setting function (setting change device 300) is added to the pachinko machine 1, the process at power-on is (1) initialization process, (2) main loop process during setting change, and (3) setting. It is necessary to have a configuration of reinitialization processing after change (display clear processing, RAM reclear processing, transition processing to a normal game, etc.), and (4) main loop processing in the game.
As described above, when the setting function is added, in addition to the setting change processing itself, processing before and after the setting change processing is also required, so that the amount of program code is significantly increased.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, processing at power on (at least a part of CPU initialization processing) and save processing at the time of power off notice (at least a part of interrupt process at power off notice), It is also used as a process after the setting change.

  Specifically, in the setting change process called during timer interrupt, if the setting change or setting reference termination condition is met, the timer interrupt process is not returned and the save process at the time of power-off notice (interrupt process at the time of power-off notice) On the way).

  In the save processing at power off notice, all output ports are cleared and the checksum is calculated and saved. After that, the power remains on, so the program returns to the beginning of the program (CPU initialization process), and the power is restored. The normal game state is shifted through the initialization process similar to the above.

  As described above, the processing after the setting change ends, by combining the processing at the time of power on and the save processing at the notice of the power off, compared with the case where the processing after the setting change is performed by a dedicated program, Can be suppressed.

  Step S332: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for clearing the inner frame closing timer. Then, when the present process is completed, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S334 (out-of-page connector C → C).

  Step S334: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the display data “rn.” In the common 0, 1 buffer.

  Step S336: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S338. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S340.

  Step S338: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting data corresponding to "-" as display data in the common 2 buffer. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S342.

  Step S340: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting data corresponding to "blank (not displayed)" as display data in the common 2 buffer. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S342.

  Step S342: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading a set value buffer. Thereby, the main control CPU 72 can acquire a set value after a setting change or the like.

  Step S344: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for converting the set value into display data.

  Step S346: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the display data converted by the process of step S344 as display data in the common 3 buffer.

  For example, when the setting value is “5 (setting 6)” and the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined, the four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 of the performance display monitor 200 sequentially select “r” from the left side. “N.” “−” “6” are displayed. In addition, when the setting value is “0 (setting 1)”, and the setting is being changed, and before the setting is determined, the four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 of the performance display monitor 200 sequentially “r” from the left “N.” “Blank (not displayed)” “1” is displayed.

  That is, the display modes “r”, “n.”, “−”, And “set value” on the performance display monitor 200 are display modes during the setting change (first display mode). The display modes "n. blank space (not displayed)" and "set value" are display modes (second display mode) during setting reference.

  By executing such processing, the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value in different display modes when the setting is being changed and when the set value is being referred to. Can be prevented from being displayed.

Further, by executing such processing, the performance display monitor 200 can display the set value or base, that is, the main control CPU 72 causes the performance display monitor 200 to display the set value or base. The base is not displayed when the performance display monitor 200 is displaying the set value, and the set value is not displayed when the performance display monitor 200 is displaying the base.
When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

Switch Management Processing
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch management process. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery trigger has been generated) from the right start winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Also here, the contents of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes the first big winning mouth count process. In the first grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable prize winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S21a.

  Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b and executes the second big winning mouth count process. In the second large winning opening count processing, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. If the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current number of normal symbol operation memory numbers is less than the upper limit number (for example, four), and obtains the random number per normal symbol if the upper limit number is not reached. To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 normally increments the number of symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the first special symbol storage update process (step S12 in FIG. 29). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol storage update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section has a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol. Random numbers can be stored one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled.

  Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number circuit 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of the random number value is performed by specifying the pin address of the random number circuit 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves the same as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol in the transfer destination address.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by specifying the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves the value as the jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol in the transfer destination address.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 acquires reach determination random numbers and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers in order from the random number counter area for fluctuation of the RAM 76 as random number values related to the fluctuation conditions of the first special symbol (acquisition of fluctuation pattern determination elements means). Similarly, acquisition of these random number values is performed by specifying the address of the variable random number counter area. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are stored in the empty section in the area. Are stored as a set (storage means, lottery element storage means). The order (for example, the first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at the current stage, the random numbers are stored sequentially from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in the FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (gaming state) is in the middle of a big hit. If the jackpot is not medium (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the subsequent steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of prefetching is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

  Step S37: If not being a big hit (Step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition effect determination process for the first special symbol. This processing determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and thereby the effect contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: When returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, next, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special drawing destination determination effect command regarding the first special symbol. The upper byte data describes that the command type is "for special drawing destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". The lower byte portion of the special drawing destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), so here, for example, a 1-word-long command by combining the upper byte with the lower byte Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the leading value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte representing the type of command, the 1-word length is obtained by adding the number of working storages after increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte Generate a rendering command. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", the number of working memories at this time is "02H" to "02H" as a result of being increased by one each from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H". It shows that it became "04H". In addition, said leading value "BBH" is a value showing that this presentation command is the operation memory number command about the 1st special symbol.

  Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. In this process, the special drawing destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the effect memory number increase effect effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124. Storage number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol storage update process (step S16 in FIG. 29). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory updating process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operating memory number counter to check whether the operating memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operating memory number counter represents the number (group number) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter has reached the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S41 and subsequent steps.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one to the second special symbol operation memory number (increment the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 30), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled based on the counter value added here.

  Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number circuit 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random value is the same as step S32 (FIG. 30) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random value is the same as step S33 (FIG. 30) described above.

  Step S44: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 30) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area To store in a set (storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 30) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (gaming state) is in the middle of a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that no effect is produced by the pre-reading for the ball entering during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This processing determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44 respectively, and thereby the effect contents It is for judging. The specific content of the process will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, an effect command of 1 word length obtained by adding, to the lower byte, the operation storage number (for example, “01H” to “04H”) after the increase with respect to the leading value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper byte indicating the type of command Generate Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 30, step S46 in FIG. 31) (predetermined determination). Execution means, prefetch processing execution means). As described above, this processing is executed for each of the first special symbol (when entering the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when entering the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to processing relating to the first special symbol and to processing relating to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are stored in the RAM 76 in the first first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 30) or the second special symbol storage update process (step S45 in FIG. 31). .

  Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determining means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random value from the comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is set in accordance with the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1 (the winning probability according to the set value). Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the hit value range (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an out-of-time variation pattern information predetermination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of disconnection. The prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly at the time of operation of the “time shortening function” is reflected in the variation pattern destination determination command generated here. For example, if the current state is at the time of operation of "time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 corresponds to "outgoing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)" based on the reach determination random number loaded. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “short-time / non-shortening fluctuation time”. In the case of reach variation, "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from reach mode random numbers, and a variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “short / mid-shortening fluctuation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is the non-operation time (low probability state) of the "time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out of reach reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number It is determined whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the “normal shift reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “normal shift reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern in the small hit, as in the case of the process in the above-described disconnection.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 executes the determination result management process of step S82 and then ends the acquisition effect determination process at the time of acquisition, and the first special symbol storage update process of the caller (FIG. 29) or the second special symbol The process returns to the storage update process (FIG. 30). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S54 that the loaded random number is not out of the hit value range but within the hit value range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag according to the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, when there is a winning value in the big hit determination random number stored so far, if the big hit symbol random number to be paired with this corresponds to "one of the probability variation symbols", the probability state will be scheduled For example, "A0H" is set in the flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value for the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "any normal symbol", the probability state is scheduled For example, “01H” is set in the flag. This value represents a flag value to be set to be in a normal (low) probability state in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit decision random number acquired later than the big hit decision random number. The flag value is reset (00H) if the winning value does not yet exist in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far. Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 next sets the low probability (normal) comparison value in the A register. The low probability comparison value is also set according to the winning probability (winning probability corresponding to the set value) at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. The probability state flag indicates whether the current internal state is a high probability (during a definite change) or not, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (during a definite change), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the probability is low (normally medium), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H” ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the loaded special symbol probability state flag does not represent high probability (≠ 01 H), and as a result, if it indicates high probability (No Then, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is set according to the winning probability (high probability according to the set value) of the pachinko machine 1 at the high probability.

  As described above, in the case where the probability state schedule flag according to the first determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability, and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the range of the hit value (lottery result destination determining means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes) ), The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described variation pattern information preliminary determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not out of the range of hit values but within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the type of big hit (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number which is paired with the big hit determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 30) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 31). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in the above step S54, and it is determined from the result whether the jackpot type corresponds to “probable variation symbol” or “normal symbol”. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol end determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents "a normal symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "01H" in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents “probability variation symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special drawing destination determination effect command. For example, "01H" is set when the special symbol destination determination value corresponds to "a normal symbol", and "A0H" is set when it corresponds to a "probable variation symbol". In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, in the case where the prior collision determination is performed only on the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following steps S56, S58, S60, S62, and S76.

  Step S56: If the main control CPU 72 confirms that the probability state schedule flag has already been set (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding judgment result is to shift to high probability (probability), as described above, “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag, and conversely, the immediately preceding judgment result If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high probability schedule (≠ 01 H), and as a result, if it represents a high probability schedule ( No) Next, step S64 is executed, and a comparative value for high probability is set.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. The step S64 is skipped and the subsequent steps S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thereby, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the big hit judgment in advance, taking into consideration the subsequent change of the internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the first determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol storage update process (FIG. 30) or the second special symbol storage update process (FIG. 31).

[Special game management processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of special game management processing.
Special game management processing is execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000), special symbol variation processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), big hit variable winning prize device This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of a management process (step S5000) and a small winning time variable winning device management process (step S6000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special game management process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be performed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special game management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

  Which process to select as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress status of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: During special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is generated for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here, similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is generated for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol stop display is performed.

  Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, an opportunity to shift to the big hit gaming state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) from the normal state until then occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set to the big hit variable winning device management processing in the previous execution selection processing (step S1000), the variation display of the special symbol is not performed. In the big win variable winning device management process, the first big winning port solenoid 90 or the second big winning port solenoid 97 counts a certain time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second or 10 game balls entered). And the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric symbol). . During this time, the game balls are intensively awarded to the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31, thereby giving the player an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game). Execution means). The opening / closing operation of the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31 at the time of a big hit is referred to as “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 15 times, these are designated as “15 rounds”. Sometimes referred to generically.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets a big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big winning variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round is set. Alternatively, each time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is ended, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (major) in that round.

  Then, when the big hit game is ended, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (high probability state, time shortened state) after the end of the big hit game based on the game state flag (probability fluctuation function operating flag, time shortening function operating flag) High probability time shortening state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery is, for example, about 10 times higher than usual (specific gaming state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability as described above, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is reduced. Is extended and the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). The “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be shifted to only one of them in control or may be shifted to both of them.

  Step S6000: The small winning hour variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small winning manner in the special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit gaming state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set to the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variation display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), but the first big prize opening is almost generated. do not do.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for example, the following winning types are provided as the plurality of winning types.
(1) "1-11 round odds 1-11"
(2) "1-6 round hits per 15 rounds"
(3) "8 rounds probable big hit"
(4) “6 rounds probable big hit”
(5) “11 rounds of normal big hit”
(6) “3 rounds probable big hit”
(7) “5 rounds probable big hit”
(8) “5 rounds of regular hits”

  The above-mentioned winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is displayed stopped when winning. For example, “11 round probability variation big hit 1-11” corresponds to “11 round probability variation symbol 1-11” big hit, “11 round normal big hit” corresponds to big hit “11 round normal symbol”. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[11 round probabilities 1-11]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11” in the special symbol stop display processing described above, a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once, and this continues until the eleventh round. In the case of “11 round probability variation 1 to 11”, the “probability variation function” and the “time shortening function” are activated after the jackpot game is ended, thereby shifting to the “high probability time shortening state”.

  Here, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the longest opening time, when a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) have occurred in one round. Be done. Also, similarly, when a prescribed number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 gaming balls) occur in one round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 does not wait for the longest opening time to elapse. It is closed.

[15-round probability variation 1-7]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “15 round probability variation symbols 1 to 7” in the special symbol stop display processing described above, the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first big prize opening 30b of the first variable prize winning device 30 or the second big prize winning opening 31b of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once, and this continues until the 15th round. In the case of “15 round probability variation symbols 1 to 7”, the “probability variation function” and the “time shortening function” are activated after the jackpot game is ended, thereby shifting to the “high probability time shortening state”.

[8 rounds probable design]
In the above-described special symbol stop display process, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “8 round probability variation symbol”, the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first big winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once, and this continues until the eighth round. When the “8-round probability variation symbol” is met, the “probability variation function” and the “time shortening function” are activated after the jackpot game is over, thereby shifting to the “high probability time shortening state”.

[6 round probability variation]
In the above-described special symbol stop display process, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “6 round probability variation symbol”, the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once, and this continues until the sixth round. When the “6 round probability variation symbol” is met, the “probability variation function” and the “time shortening function” are activated after the jackpot game is over, thereby shifting to the “high probability time shortening state”.

[11 round normal design]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stop displayed in the form of “11 round normal symbols”, a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the opening of the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is performed one by one, and this continues until the eleventh round. When it corresponds to "11 round normal", it shifts to the "low probability time shortening state" by activating the "time shortening function" after the end of the big hit game.

[3 round probability variable design]
In the above-described special symbol stop display process, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “three round probability variation symbol”, a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the second big prize opening 31b of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once, and this continues until the third round. When the “three-round probability variation symbol” is met, the “probability variation function” and the “time shortening function” are activated after the jackpot game is over, thereby shifting to the “high probability time shortening state”.

[5-round probability variation pattern]
In the above-described special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “5-round probability variation symbol”, a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the second big prize winning opening 31b of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once, and this continues until the fifth round. When the “5-round probability variation symbol” is met, the “probability variation function” and the “time shortening function” are activated after the jackpot game is over, thereby shifting to the “high probability time shortening state”.

[5 round normal design]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stop displayed in the form of “five round normal symbol”, a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the second big prize winning opening 31b of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once, and this continues until the fifth round. When it corresponds to "5 round normal", it shifts to "low probability time shortening state" by activating "time shortening function" after the end of the big hit game.

  In any case, when the winning symbol corresponds to any of the "probable symbols", a bonus is given to the player to shift the internal state to the "high probability time shortening state" after the big hit game is over. On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to any of the "normal symbols", the internal state shifts to the "short probability time shortening state" after the big hit game is over.

  The opening time, the interval time between rounds, and the ending time during the big hit game are respectively “5.0 seconds”, “1.5 seconds”, and “7.0 seconds”. The opening time is the waiting time from the start of the big hit game to the opening of the big winning opening, and the inter-round interval time is the waiting time set between the rounds, ending The time is a waiting time set after the final round of the jackpot game ends.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes (special game execution means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state in the special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state). Game) to be executed. In such a small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), there is hardly any winning in the first big winning opening. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability variation function” does not operate and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so the state shifts to the “high probability state” or “time reduction state”. Benefits are not granted (not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win the small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" will not end after the small hit game is finished, and even if you win the small hit in the "time reduction state", the small After the end of the hit game, "time saving state" never ends (except when the upper limit number is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pretreatment]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Each step will be described below.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is larger than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the operation memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads one of the random numbers for lottery (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, whichever corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 sequentially reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers from the top section, and moves the remaining random numbers to the previous section one by one (shift ). The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. Note that the program may be a program in which random numbers are read out in the order simply stored without providing such a priority order by special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one from the value of the operation memory number counter (one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been shifted the random number) stored in the RAM 76 and subtracts it. The later value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". Thereby, the display mode of the memory number by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1). When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the range of the jackpot value, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. Ru. Then, if the random number value read out at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400. Here, the range of the big hit value is set according to the set value. For this reason, the range of the big hit value is wider when the setting is higher than when the setting is low.

  If the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination processing, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (lottery execution) means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. In other words, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as a condition that operates the first variable winning device 30 as in the "big hit". The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different or the same between the normal probability state and the high probability state (during probability fluctuation function operation). In any case, if the read random number is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and the process proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance as a hit range other than the non-winning, according to the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value. When a setting difference is provided in the winning probability for the small hit, the range of the small hit value is set according to the set value. For this reason, the range of the small hit value is wider in the high setting than in the low setting.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination processing. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of release by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the center It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines a variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for a special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). In addition, even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. The number may be shortened (for example, 0 at the start of variable display operation → about 12.5 seconds, 1 at the start of variable display operation → about 8 seconds, 2 at the start of variable display operation → 5 About 2 seconds, at the start of fluctuation display 3 working memory number → about 2.5 seconds). Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer. In addition, the information regarding the fluctuation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to a presentation control apparatus as a fluctuation pattern command (the same also at the time of winning).

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery falls under the non-winning condition, for example, “reach effect” is generated on the effect and the control is performed without causing the “reach effect”. And Then, in the “time variation pattern selection table for losing”, a variation pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect” is defined in advance, and when it corresponds to non-winning, One of the variation patterns is to be selected. In addition, the reach effect includes various reach effects such as normal reach effect, long reach effect, super reach effect and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (low probability / high probability non-time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of low probability or high probability non-time shortening state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern specifying means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “250”, “255 (FFH)”. The "variation pattern number""1" to "8" are assigned to each "comparison value".

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” and “7” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. The variation pattern number “8” corresponds to a variation pattern (specific variation pattern) that is lost after super reach. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of operation memories at the start of variation (the same applies hereinafter).

  Here, the length of the set fluctuation time is greatly different between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, while the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds according to the number of stored memories), the "reach fluctuation pattern" is This corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

  By adopting such a table configuration, “the shift variation pattern 8 after super reach” is selected at a ratio of about 1 / 51.2 (= 5/256). That is, when the result of the internal lottery is a loss, the super reach effect will be executed at a rate of once per 51.2 change on average. For this reason, the setting suggestion using the wipe effect described later is also executed at a rate of about once every 51.2 fluctuations on average.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. It is provided, and the "variation pattern number" of "21" to "28" is assigned to each "comparison value".

  Variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and variation pattern numbers “26” to “28” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. However, since the variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” are non-reach variations due to time shortening variations, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and corresponds to the comparison value if the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the high probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The "variation pattern number""41" to "48" are assigned to each "comparison value".

  The variation pattern numbers “41” to “45” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing the reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “46” to “48” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. However, the fluctuation pattern numbers “41” to “45” are fluctuation times that are extremely shortened as the fluctuation time in the normal state (for example, about 0.5 seconds) in order to realize high-speed fluctuation in the high probability time reduction state. Is set.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and corresponds to the comparison value if the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "42" as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (special section).
The selection table is a table used when the high probability time shortening state or the low probability time shortening state special section is not winning (variation pattern specifying means). In addition, a special section is a section to shift after the big hit game end when it corresponds to "11 round probability strange symbol 1-11" or "11 round normal symbol", and the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is 1 or more It is a section to shift to.

  Here, in order to realize the treasure challenge production to be described later, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the break in the special section of the high probability time shortened state or the low probability time shortened state is all the same variation pattern (the variation time is about 20 seconds, for example). Is set, and this selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach special variation pattern 50).

  Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “50” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random number value. The non-reach special variation pattern 50 is a special variation pattern in which the variation time is fixed, and the variation time is not shortened depending on the number of memories.

[See Figure 34: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are the control procedures when the big hit determination result is out (other than non-winning), but the determination result is big hit (step S2400: Yes) or small hit (step S2402: Yes) The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the current winning symbol (big hit stop symbol number) according to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is previously defined in the special symbol determination data table (winning type specifying means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the big hit stop symbol selection table in the big hit stop symbol determination process, and can determine the type of the winning symbol from the stored contents based on the big hit symbol random number.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, as a winning symbol to be selected at the time of big hit, "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11", "15 round probability variation symbols 1 to 6", "8 round probability variation symbols", "6 round probability variation symbols", "11 round “Normal design”, “3-round probability variation symbol”, “5-round probability variation symbol”, and “5-round normal symbol” are prepared. Each winning symbol may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, “11 round probability variation 1”, “11 round probability variation 1a”, “11 round probability variation 1b”, “11 round probability variation 1c”, and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 39 is a view showing a configuration example of a first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type specifying means).

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value “2”, “3”, “31”, “1”, “ “10”, “2”, and “35” correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. In the second column from the left, “11 round probability variation 1 to 11”, “15 round probability variation 1”, “8 round probability variation symbol”, “6 round probability variation symbol” corresponding to each distribution value, "11 round regular symbols" are shown. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of “11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 9” selected is 2/100 (= 2%), respectively, and “11 round probability variation symbol 10” is selected. The ratio of 3/100 (= 3%), “11 round probability variation 11” is selected is 31/100 (= 31%), and “15 round probability variation 1” is selected. The ratio to be selected is 1/100 (= 1%), the ratio that “8-round probability variable symbol” is selected is 10/100 (= 10%), and the ratio that “6 round probability variable symbol” is selected Is 2/100 (= 2%), and the ratio at which “11 round normal symbol” is selected is 35/100 (= 35%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

  Here, "the substance" in the figure means the number of round games that are long opened in a big hit game that includes a round game in which the big winning opening is short-opened and a round game in which the big winning opening is long-opening Is shown. The round game may be executed using the first large winning opening, or may be performed using the second large winning opening. Further, "next time" in the figure means that "10,000 times" is set as the number of probability variations. A jackpot in which the number of rounds matches the real number indicates that there is no round game that is released short (only a round game that is released long).

  In any case, when the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described, for example, by a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte is that the winning symbol of this time is selected at the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents In addition, the EVENT values “01H” to “0FH” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each in the selection table. Therefore, for example, when the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and "11 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H" It will be

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

  The three columns on the right side of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table show the values of the probability variation number, the time reduction number, and the special variation number given after the big hit game ends.

[Number of definite variations]
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to any of the probability variation symbols, the number of probability variations is given 10000 times (certain variation next time). On the other hand, when it corresponds to any of the normal symbols, the number of definite variations is not given.

[Time savings]
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 10", "15 round probability variation symbols 1", "8 round probability variation symbols", and "6 round probability variation symbols", the number of time reductions is given 10000 times ( Next time) Moreover, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbol 11", the number of time saving is given 10 times. In this case, when the probability change (high probability time reduction state) ends for 10 variations, the state shifts to the latent probability change state (high probability non-time reduction state). In addition, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbol 11" in the latent probability variation state, the number of time saving may be granted 10000 times (so-called no latency continuation). Furthermore, when it corresponds to "11 round normal symbols", time saving number of times is given 10 times. In this case, when the time shortening of 10 fluctuations (the low probability time shortening state) ends, the state shifts to the normal state (the low probability non-time shortening state).

[Number of special changes]
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" and "11 round normal symbols", the number of special variation is set. Specifically, "one time" is set as the number of special variation when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation 1", and "2 times" as the number of special variation when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation 2" Is set, and such setting continues to “11 round odd symbol 10”, “10 times” as the number of special changes when “11 round positive symbol 11” or “11 round normal symbol” is applicable. It is set. In addition, when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation 1", "8 round probability variation", and "6 round probability variation", the number of special changes is not set.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type specifying means).

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each allocation value is “33”, “4”, “3”, “6”. , “8”, “3”, “5”, and “35” correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “15-round probability variation symbol 2”, “3-round probability variation symbol”, “5-round probability variation symbol”, and “5-round normal symbol” corresponding to the distribution value are shown. ing. That is, at the time of big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio for selecting “15 round probability symbol 2” is 33/100 (= 33%), and “15 round probability symbol 4, 5” is selected The ratio of each selected is 3/100 (= 3%), the ratio of “15 round probability variation 6” is selected is 6/100 (= 6%), and “15 round probability variation 7” is The ratio selected is 8/100 (= 8%), the ratio of “3-round probability variable design” is 3/100 (= 3%), and “5-round probability variable design” is selected. Rate is 5/100 (= 5%), and the rate at which the "5 round regular symbol" is selected is 35/100 (= 35%).

  If the result of the current big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU72 performs the selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above-mentioned MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol It represents that. Further, the EVENT values “01H” to “09H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each in the selection table. Therefore, for example, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and "15 round probability variation symbol 2" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H01H". Become.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

  The three columns on the right side of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table show the values of the probability variation number, the time reduction number, and the special variation number given after the big hit game ends.

[Number of definite variations]
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to any of the probability variation symbols, the number of probability variations is given 10000 times (certain variation next time). On the other hand, when it corresponds to any of the normal symbols, the number of definite variations is not given.

[Time savings]
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation symbols 2 to 7", "3 round probability variation symbols", and "5 round probability variation symbols", the time reduction number is given 10000 times (certain variation next time). On the other hand, when it corresponds to "5 round normal symbols", the number of time saving is given 100 times (100 times saving). In this case, when the time reduction for 100 fluctuations (low probability time shortening state) is completed, the state shifts to the normal state (low probability non-time shortening state).

[Number of special changes]
In the present embodiment, in the case of winning with the second special symbol, the number of special variations is not set.

[See Figure 34: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the case of a big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than the time of departure is generally determined.

  In the present embodiment, if the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit, control is performed such that, for example, “reach effect” is generated on the effect to be a big hit. And in the "big hit variation pattern selection table", a variation pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of "reach effects" is defined, and when it is a big hit, any variation pattern is selected from among them It will be. In addition, the reach effect includes various reach effects such as normal reach effect, long reach effect, super reach effect and the like. Basically, super reach production has longer fluctuation time and higher expectation for winning than reach production such as normal reach production and long reach production. Also, when winning with the time shortening function activated, a variation pattern with a short variation time (a variation pattern without a reach effect) may be selected without selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time. Good.

[Example of big hit fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability / high probability non-time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the low probability or high probability non-time shortening state (variation pattern specifying means). In the present embodiment, the variation patterns are not distinguished depending on the type of jackpot (winning symbol), but a dedicated variation pattern selection table may be used for each jackpot (the same applies hereinafter). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. It is provided, and the "variation pattern number""61" to "68" is assigned to each "comparison value".

  The variation pattern numbers “61” to “66” correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the super reach production is performed, and the variation pattern numbers “67” and “68” are the reach production (other than the super reach production). It corresponds to the variation pattern that is won by the reach production).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and corresponds to the comparison value if the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value. The variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the low probability time shortening state (variation pattern specifying means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. It is provided, and the "variation pattern number" of "81" to "88" is assigned to each "comparison value".

  The variation pattern numbers “81” to “88” correspond to the variation patterns that are the reach effect and hit.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and corresponds to the comparison value if the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The "variation pattern numbers""101" to "108" are assigned to the respective "comparison values".

  The variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” correspond to the variation patterns that are the reach effect and hit. Note that when winning in the high probability time shortening state, a variation pattern that is a hit may be set without a reach effect.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. The variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern selection table (special section).
This selection table is a table used when a high probability time shortening state or a low probability time shortening state special section and corresponds to a big hit (variation pattern specifying means).

  Here, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit in the special section of high probability time shortening state or low probability time shortening state is the same fluctuation pattern (all the same fluctuation pattern ( The fluctuation time is set to, for example, about 30 seconds, and this selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation pattern 170 per non-reach).

  Accordingly, the main control CPU 72 selects “170” as the variation pattern number regardless of the value of the obtained variation pattern determination random number value. The non-reach special fluctuation pattern 170 is a special fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is fixed, and the fluctuation time is not shortened by the number of memories.

[See Figure 34: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the value of the probability variation function operation flag as a game state flag when the type of the winning symbol (big hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S 2410 is “any probability symbol”. 01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means). The main control CPU 72 also resets the value of the probability variation function operation flag as the game state flag when the type of the winning symbol determined in the previous step S 2410 is “any normal symbol” (low probability state setting means Low probability state transition means, probability state setting means).

  In addition, the main control CPU72, even if the winning symbol type (big hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is "any winning symbol", the main control CPU72 as a game state flag time reduction function operation flag Value (01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operation means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type (small hit time stop symbol number) of the winning symbol at the small hit based on the big hit symbol random number. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the small hit is previously defined in the small hit special symbol selection table (win type specifying means). In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol for the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated dedicated random number may be used.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is only one kind of "twice open small hit symbol". However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As mentioned above, the "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not become a trigger for the state after it to change to the "high probability state" or the "time shortening state", so this type of pachinko machine is essential " A "one open small hit design" can be provided without being bound by the provision of two rounds (open twice) or more.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, it is possible to select the reach fluctuation pattern in the case of a small hit, or to select a fluctuation pattern equal to the time of the out-of-normal fluctuation.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (at the time of failure / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special game management process.

[FIG. 33: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the variation timer value from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer counter according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the value of. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination processing (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 34). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Time-of-day variation pattern determination processing]
FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of procedure of out-of-time variation pattern determination processing. Each step will be described below.

  Step S2600: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0”. The “variation pattern selection counter value” is a counter value managed by the main control CPU 72 and is a variable referred to when executing special variation. The variation pattern selection counter value is set in a special variation number setting process (FIG. 55) described later.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2606. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is not larger than "0", that is, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is "0" (No), the main control The CPU 72 executes step S2602.

  The case where the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than "0" means that a special variation is performed, and the case where the variation pattern selection counter value is "0" is a special variation. It means not to run.

  Step S2602: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. The internal state can be confirmed by the probability variation function operation flag and the time shortening function operation flag (the same applies hereinafter).

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2608. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2604.

  Step S2604: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2610. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2612.

Step S2606: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a variation pattern with reference to the special section of the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (FIG. 38).
Step S2608: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a fluctuation pattern with reference to the loss time fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 37) for the high probability time shortening state.

Step S2610: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a fluctuation pattern with reference to the loss time fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 36) for the low probability time shortening state.
Step S2612: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a variation pattern with reference to the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (FIG. 35) for the non-time shortened state (low probability / high probability non-time shortened state).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 34).

[Big hit fluctuation pattern determination process]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart of an example of a procedure of jackpot variation pattern determination processing. Each step will be described below.

  Step S2710: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and checks whether the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2716. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is not larger than "0", that is, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is "0" (No), the main control The CPU 72 executes step S2712.

  Step S2712: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2718. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2714.

  Step S2714: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S2720. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2722.

Step S2716: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a variation pattern with reference to the big hit variation pattern selection table (FIG. 44) for the special section.
Step S2718: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a fluctuation pattern with reference to the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 43) for the high probability time reduction state.

Step S2720: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a fluctuation pattern with reference to the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 42) for the low probability time shortening state.
Step S2720: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a variation pattern with reference to the big hit variation pattern selection table (FIG. 41) for the non-time shortened state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 34).

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of special symbol storage area shift processing. If the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than “0” in the previous special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2100 in FIG. 34: Yes), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Each step will be described below.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the working memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. This confirmation can be performed with reference to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 1 or more (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as a target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the operation memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 0 (step S2210: No), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted the storage area To do. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as a target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the special symbol of the target designated in either step S2212 or step S2214 above. In addition, about the content of a specific process, it is as having already stated in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation storage counter for the special symbol of interest. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (−1) the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memory at the start of change” from the value of the operation memory counter after subtraction. Here, the value of the operation memory counter may be added to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and then the “number of operation memories at start of fluctuation” may be set.

Step S2222: In addition, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the present memory area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the effect memory number reduction effect command has a lower byte value (for example, "00H" to "03H" for indicating the number of action memories after reduction with respect to the leading value (for example, "BCH") for the upper byte indicating the command type. )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", the number of working memories "4" (command notation "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and the current working memory number is "3" (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). In addition, said leading value "BCH" is a value showing that this presentation command is an operation memory number command about the 2nd special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the effect memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the leading value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that the preceding value is an operation memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 34).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of processing during special symbol stop display. Each step will be described below.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

  Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended yet (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 33) also in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The “stop display time end command” is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to the “big hit variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (overall role) is started, the low probability non-time shortening state is transitioned.

  Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the big hit symbol. For example, if the type of the big hit is "15 round big hit", the value corresponding to "15 rounds" is set in the continuous operation number status. Also, if the type of the big hit is "3 round big hit", the value indicating the "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation number status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command representing a big hit. A state command representing a big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

  Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type (stop symbol number) of the big hit symbol determined in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 34). For example, when the type of jackpot is “15 rounds jackpot”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “15 rounds”. When the big hit type is “3 round big hit”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “3 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, in the case other than the big hit time, the following procedure is executed.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the value (01H) of the big hit flag is not set in step S4300 (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, if the small hit flag value (01H) is not set either and it is simply out of step (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, when the small hit flag value (01H) is set (Step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the small hit variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (during small hit)” as an internal state flag for control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command representing a small hit. A state command representing a small hit is sent to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

  Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes special variation management processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for managing special fluctuations executed after the end of the big hit game. The contents of the special variation management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cut counter. In the "counting counter", the respective counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time count area of the RAM 76 in the "high probability state" and the "time shortening state". Here, although "counting" is used, the value of the counting counter in the "high probability state" can be set to an extremely large value (for example, 10000 times or more). By setting such a huge value, it can be stochastically guaranteed that the “high probability state” will continue until the next winning is obtained. In addition, the value (for example, 10 times, 100 times, 10000 times etc.) according to the winning symbol is set to the number cut counter regarding the "time shortening state".

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count-down counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. On the other hand, if the number cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the number cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management processing. On the other hand, when the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag at the time of operation of the number cut function. It is the probability fluctuation function activation flag or the time shortening function activation flag that is reset, but the value of the number cut counter that counts the high probability state in the “high probability state” is not substantially zero. It is the time saving function activation flag that is actually reset. Thereby, the time shortening state and the high probability state are ended after the stop display of the special symbol. When the above procedure is completed, the processing returns to the special game management processing.

Special variation management process
FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of special variation management processing. Each step will be described below.

  Step S4660: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76 and checks whether the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4662. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not larger than "0", that is, when the variation pattern selection counter value is "0" (No), the main control CPU 72 has a special symbol It returns to the process during stop display (FIG. 48).

Step S4662: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of decrementing (subtracting 1) the variation pattern selection counter value. As a result, the number of times of executing the special variation (the number of times of execution of the special variation) is reduced by one.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 48).

[Variable winning device management process for big hits]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the big hit variable winning prize device management process.
The big hit variable winning device management process is a big hit game process selection processing (step S5100), a big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting processing (step S5200), a big hit big winning opening opening and closing operation processing (step S5300), a big hit large This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a winning opening closing process (step S5400) and a big hit end process (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the jackpot gaming process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the big hit variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process to select as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, in a situation where the operation (opening and closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit time big winning opening open pattern setting processing as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit big winning opening opening and closing operation processing (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big hit opening big winning opening If the operation process has been completed, the big hit special prize closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big hit big winning opening / closing operation process and the big hit big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs a big hit finish process (the next jump destination) Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting processing]
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times of opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit, and the time of each opening. Each step will be described below.

  Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes an opening pattern setting process by symbol. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. Number of winnings), opening time, ending time etc. are set. Note that the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during the opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). Not very difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol selected in the big jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 34). Specifically, if “15 round big hit” is selected as the type of big hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 15 times. If “3 round big hit” is selected as the big hit type, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to three. The number of execution rounds set here is stored, for example, in the buffer area of the RAM 76.

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit release timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. In addition, if about 29.0 seconds are set as the value of the big hit opening timer, the opening time is a sufficient time for entering the big winning opening easily during one opening (for example, the firing control) 10 or more game balls are fired by the board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if the timer value is set to 0.1 seconds, the opening time is a short time that hardly occurs (becomes difficult) even if it is not possible to enter the big winning opening during one opening. (For example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the firing control board set 174).

  Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets a special winning opening interval timer based on the special winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process, and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 50).

[Big hit big winning opening opening and closing operation processing]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a big winning prize opening / closing operation process for a big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big prize winning interval timer is counting down. Specifically, whether or not the special winning opening interval timer is counting down may be confirmed by checking whether or not the special winning opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already in operation. it can.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the big prize winning interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5314. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the big prize opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is generated based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 operates, and it shifts from a closed state to an open state.

  When the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened, the main control CPU 72 generates a first large winning opening opening command or a second large winning opening opening command. The first large winning opening opening command and the second large winning opening opening command are transmitted to the effect control device 124.

  Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous big hit big prize opening release pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 51) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special winning opening open time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Run.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of gaming balls that have won in the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning opening during opening or the second large winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). The predetermined number defines the upper limit (upper limit of winning balls) of the number of winning balls allowed per opening (one round during a big hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. Next, when the big win variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of the above steps S5301 to S5310. Execute repeatedly.

  If it is determined in step S5306 above that the special winning opening open time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count number has reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 performs step S5312 next. Run.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening. Specifically, the generation of the drive signal to be applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is ended. Thereby, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

  When the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is closed, the main control CPU 72 generates a first large winning opening closing command or a second large winning opening closing command. The first big winning opening closing command and the second big winning opening closing command are transmitted to the effect control device 124.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval timer countdown processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a countdown of the big winning opening interval timer set in the big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 51).

  Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening interval time has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the big prize opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the big prize opening interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control is performed. The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 50) for the big hit. Then, when the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation processing is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the big prize winning interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5318.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the release number counter after increment has reached the number set in the current round. Here, the reason why "the number of times set in the current round" is determined is, for example, "make the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 open more than once in one round during a big hit" This is to cope with the open pattern of

  When the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times within one round is not adopted, the “number of times set within the current round” in each round is set once for each round. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322 since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening and closing operation in each round (Yes).

  On the other hand, when a pattern in which a plurality of opening / closing operations are repeated in one round is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No).

  In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at this stage, the procedure from step S5301 to step S5320 is performed. Execute repeatedly. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning big prize opening closing process, and returns to the big win variable winning device management process. Then, when the big win time variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a big hit time big winning opening closing process.

[Big win time big prize mouth closing processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for the big winning opening closing process for the big hit. This big winning time big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the above round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after 1 subtraction) (No) Then, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. The number-of-rounds command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process. The effect control device 124 can check the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the big hit variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 in the big hit game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 50), the big jump time big winning opening / closing operation process is the next jump destination. Run. Then, after the execution of the jackpot big winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the big hit big winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are executed. Execute repeatedly. Thus, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (15 times or the like).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the big hit end processing.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management processing. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[Big hit end processing]
FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big hit end process. This big hit end process is for adjusting the condition when the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit is finished. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value to the big hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) as time passes.

  Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer has not yet become 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 50).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big hit time end timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit time end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 34) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process.

  Step S5508: If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set (step S5506: YES), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability variations (for example, 10000 times). The value of the set number of probability fluctuations is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76, and becomes the above-mentioned number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, when an enormous number of times of about 10,000 times is set as described above, there is almost no probability that non-winning will continue to that point (the winning probability at high probability is, for example, 1/32 to 1/100. The degree of probability) will continue until the next winning. On the contrary, in the case where the high probability state has a substantial upper limit, the number of probability fluctuations is set to a practical number (for example, about 70) (so-called truncation probability variation). If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the time shortening function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 34) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 10, 100 times, or 10,000 times). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of time reductions set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, in response to the resetting of the jackpot flag or the end of the winning combination, a state designation command representing "normally medium" is generated as the gaming state. In addition, if the probability variation function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “time reduction in progress”. Generate a state specification command representing "." These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process.

  Step S5515: The main control CPU 72 executes special variation count setting processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a variation pattern selection counter value based on the type of the winning symbol. The contents of the special variation count setting process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit time big winning opening releasing pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 33) in the special game management process as the special symbol variation pre-processing. When the above procedure is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process.

[Special variation count setting process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart of an example of a procedure of special variation count setting processing. Each step will be described below.

  Step S5600: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current win corresponds to any of “11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11” or “11 round normal symbols”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current win corresponds to any of “11 round probability symbols 1 to 11” or “11 round normal symbols” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5602. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the current win corresponds to either “11 round probability variation 1 to 11” or “11 round normal symbol”, the main control CPU 72 performs the big hit end processing (FIG. 54). To return.

Step S5602: The main control CPU 72 sets a value according to the winning symbol to the fluctuation pattern selection counter value. The value corresponding to the winning symbol is set in accordance with the value of the number of special variations shown in FIG. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game, the special variation is executed one to ten times. Note that the set variation pattern selection counter value is decremented by one each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed once. Then, through such processing, the main control CPU 72 can make the selected fluctuation pattern a normal fluctuation or a special fluctuation.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit end process (FIG. 54).

[Small hit variable pay device management process]
FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of the small hitting variable winning prize device management process.
Small hit time variable winning device management process, small hit time game process selection process (step S6100), small hit time large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), small hit time large winning opening opening and closing operation process (step S6300) The small winning large winning opening closing process (step S6400), the small hitting time ending process (step S6500) is a configuration including a subroutine group.

  Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small winning hour variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. . Which process to select as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. Do. On the other hand, if the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting processing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S6300) as the next jump destination, If the winning opening / closing operation processing has been completed, the small winning big winning opening closing process (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hitting large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 executes the small hit end process as the next jump destination (step S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Small hit big winning opening opening pattern setting processing]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times of opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit and the time of each opening. Each step will be described below.

  Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit open pattern”, for example, an open pattern of “0.1 second open” is set for each of the first and second times. Since "small hit" does not have the concept of "round", "open pattern" is also written as "first open" and "second open".

  Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets, for example, twice the number of times of opening of the special winning opening based on the special winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of times of release set here is stored, for example, in the buffer area of the RAM 76.

  Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hit open timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit release timer, and in such an open time, most of the winnings at the big prize opening occur during one open. No (becomes difficult) short time (for example, a time shorter than one second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the launcher unit).

  Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit time interval timer. The value of the timer set here is a standby time for each opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to, for example, about 2 seconds.

  Step S6220: After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening / closing operation process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 56). The main control CPU 72 then executes a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Small hit big winning opening opening and closing operation processing]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big prize opening opening / closing operation process. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether or not the interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in the following step S6314 is already operating.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S6314. On the other hand, if it can not be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

  Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is generated. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operate | moves and it transfers to an open state from a closed state.

  Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hitting big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 57) is executed.

  Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S6308. Run.

  Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of gaming balls that have won in the first variable winning device 30 (the first large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal inputted from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). The predetermined number defines the upper limit (upper limit of winning balls) of the number of winning balls allowed per opening (one opening at the small hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning prize apparatus management process (FIG. 56). Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

  If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set to a short time, the main control CPU 72 usually proceeds to step S6310 before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number at the time of small hit. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has ended.

  Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big winning opening. Specifically, the generation of the drive signal for applying to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is ended. Thereby, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval timer countdown processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the above-mentioned small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 57).

  Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown processing is 0 or less is checked. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. The end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 56) is restored. When the small hit large winning opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the first step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown processing becomes 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

  Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process. Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a small hitting big prize opening closing process.

[Small hit big winning opening closing process]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big prize opening closing process. The small winning big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 57). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to small hit time large winning opening opening and closing operation processing.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 56).

  Next, when the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the small jump large winning opening opening and closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the small hitting game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 56). Run. After executing the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small winning big prize opening closing process until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of opening times (two times). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

  When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6418.

  Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the release number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the small hit end processing.

  Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 56). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hitting end process is selected this time.

[End processing for small hits]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart of an example of a small hit end process. The small hit time end process is for adjusting the condition when the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the small hit time is ended. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value to the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (each call of this module) as time passes.

  Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the small hit time end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer is not yet zero, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends the present module and returns to the small hit variable winning prize device management process (FIG. 56).

  Thereafter, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

  Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), deletes “meeting small hit” from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game. In the case of a big hit, the internal condition device is activated (for example, the flag corresponding to the condition device is turned ON), but in the case of a small hit, the internal condition device is not particularly activated. The procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 33) in the special game management process as the special symbol variation pre-processing. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process.

[LED display setting process]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of LED display setting processing.
The LED display setting process is the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), the state display setting process (step S1220), the operation memory display setting process (step S1230), the continuous operation number display setting This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, and the normal symbol display setting processing (step S1230). In the process of generating drive signals (common output data) to be applied to the LEDs of the symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a. is there. The generated data for common output (display data) is stored in the RAM of the use area and is output in the dynamic port output process (the same applies hereinafter).

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating drive signals (common output data) to be applied to the respective LEDs of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d and the short time state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal (common output data) for the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. Generate The probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to be lit until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started or until the probability variation function is turned off after the special symbol variation display has been performed a predetermined number of times. The display is switched (off). Further, the probability variation state display lamp 38d does not light up when the latent probability changing state (high probability non-time shortening state) is entered, but a power-off state occurs in the latent probability changing state and the power is turned off without clearing the RAM. Lights up when recovered. On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time shortening function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 makes a lighting signal (common to the LED corresponding to the time-short state display lamp 38e) regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Generate output data). Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f in accordance with the firing position designation status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game (when “1” is set in the launch position designation status), the main control CPU 72 launches A lighting signal (common output data) for LED corresponding to the position designation lamp 38f is generated. On the other hand, when it is in the normal game in the low probability non-time shortening state (when the launch position designation status is set to “0”), the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f ( Does not generate common output data). If the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72, in addition to the above-mentioned time reduction state display lamp 38e, turns on the lighting signal (for common output) for the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. Generate data). Note that the launch position designation lamp 38f is turned on from the start of the big hit game until the end of the "time reduced state" when the game is shifted to the "time reduced state" through the big hit game, and is not turned on when the "time reduced state" ends ( It becomes OFF).

The probability variation state display lamp 38d can employ any of the following lighting methods.
(1) The first lighting method is mainly used for models equipped with the function of latent probability change, and does not light even in the probability fluctuation state (high probability state), and is the probability fluctuation state at power on It is a method to light up in the case of. For example, when there is a latent certainty change state, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d can not be turned on when it shifts to the latent certainty change state, and it is lighted even during the certainty change (high probability time reduction state) You can avoid it.
(2) The second lighting method is a method mainly used for a model not equipped with the function of latent probability variation, and is a lighting method for lighting in the case of a probability fluctuation state.
As these lighting methods, one of the lighting methods can be adopted depending on the specification of the model of the gaming machine and the like.

  Further, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a, 38b and 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 generates lighting signals (common output data) for the big hit type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number status. At this time, it is the combination of the display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the status of continuous operation frequency that is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status designates “15 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 determines that all lamps (for example, display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c) corresponding to the lighting pattern representing “15 rounds”. A lighting signal (common output data) for the lamp) is generated. If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies “3 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 turns on a lighting signal (common output) for a lamp (for example, only the lamp 38a) corresponding to the lighting pattern indicating “3 rounds”. Data) is generated. Since six lighting patterns can be displayed by the three display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c, it is possible to correspond to the six types of jackpots of the present embodiment. The details of the lighting pattern corresponding to the number of rounds are preferably displayed around the display lamps 38a, 38b and 38c in order to be clearly transmitted to the player.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart of a first procedure example of an addition number calculation process. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

Step S602: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the normal winning ball addition number, the normal out addition number, and the total out addition number.
The normal winning ball addition number is a variable indicating a value to be added to the normal winning ball number. The normal out addition number is a variable indicating a value to be added to the normal out number. The total out addition number is a variable indicating a value to be added to the total out number.

  Step S604: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the out switch 99.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal has been input (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S606. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S608.

  Step S606: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the total out addition number. For example, when the value of the total out addition number is “0”, the value of the total out addition number is “1”.

  Step S608: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading the special game management phase. The value of the special game management phase will be described later.

  Step S610: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot is in progress. Whether or not the jackpot is in progress can be confirmed by the value of the special game management phase (in the jackpot: special game management phase = "03H" to "07H").

  As a result, when it is confirmed that a big hit is being made (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22). On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the jackpot is in progress (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S612.

  Step S612: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the time is short. Whether the time is short can be confirmed by the time shortening function activation flag.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the time is short (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the time is short (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S614.

  Step S614: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a right-handed instruction is being issued. Whether or not a right-handed instruction is being issued can be confirmed by the launch position designation status.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the right-handed command is being issued (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the right-handed instruction is being issued (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S616.

  By executing the process of step S614, the main control CPU 72 can determine whether or not to calculate the base based on the content of the launch position designation status (based on the content determined by the launch position determining means). (Base calculation execution decision means).

  Further, by executing the processing of step S610 to step S614, the main control CPU 72 should fire a game ball in the second game area when the big hit game is being executed, when it is in a time saving state, or If it is determined that there is any, it can be determined not to calculate the base (base calculation executability determining means).

  Furthermore, by executing the processing of step S610 to step S614, the main control CPU 72 should launch a game ball in the first game area when the big hit game is not being executed, when it is in a non-time-reduced state, or In any of the cases where it is determined that there is, it can be determined that the base is calculated (base calculation execution determination unit).

  Step S616: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the out switch 99.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal has been input (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S618. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S620.

  Step S618: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the normal out addition number. For example, when the value of the normal out addition number is “0”, the value of the normal out addition number is “1”.

  Step S620: Has the main control CPU 72 received a detection signal from each winning port switch (for example, the middle starting winning port switch 80, the right starting winning port switch 82, the first winning port switch 86, the second winning port switch 81)? Check if it is not.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal is input (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S622. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

Step S622: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding all the prize balls generated by the current interruption to the normal prize ball addition number.
For example, the value of the normal out addition number is "0", and with this interruption, the middle start winning opening 26 (medium starting winning opening switch 80: number of winning balls = 4), right start winning opening 28a (right start winning combination) Mouth switch 82: number of winning balls = 1), normal winning opening 22 (first winning port switch 86: number of winning balls = 3), each one game ball entered, the value of the normal out addition number Becomes “8 (= 4 + 1 + 3)”. The winning ball target switch and the winning ball number are determined based on the winning ball number data stored in the use area. Since the switches for the winning balls and the number of winning balls may differ depending on the model, this processing is processing dependent on the model.

  When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart of a second procedure example of the addition number calculation process. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example. In addition, about a 1st procedure example and a 2nd procedure example, any one procedure example is employable.

  Step S630: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the out switch 99.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal is input from the out switch 99 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S631. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the detection signal is input from the out switch 99 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S632.

  Step S631: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the detection signal is input from the out switch 99, the main control CPU 72 sets “1” to the number B of fired balls (total out addition number).

  Step S632: If the main control CPU 72 cannot confirm that the detection signal has been input from the out switch 99, it sets “0” to the number B of fired balls (total out addition number).

  Step S633: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a specific gaming state. The reason why it is determined whether or not the game state is a specific game state is that in the specific game state, the number of shot balls A and the number of acquired balls are not counted.

  Here, the specific gaming state can include at least one state among (1) big hit, (2) short time, and (3) right-handed instruction. In addition, the reason for including “(3) right-handed instruction” is that the specific game state is “in the small hit rush state (while using the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously, This is because it is included in a state where small hits frequently occur due to fluctuations in special symbols, that is, a high probability non-time shortened state), and does not include "latency probability changing (high probability non-time shortened state)". .

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming state is the specific gaming state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S634. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the gaming state is a specific gaming state (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S635.

  Step S634: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting “0” to the number of shot balls A (normal out addition number) and setting “0” to the number of acquired balls (normal prize ball addition number). When this process ends, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

  Step S635: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of copying (substituting) the value of the number of shot balls B (total out addition number) into the number of shot balls A (normal out addition number).

Step S636: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the total number of winning balls by the game balls won in the winning opening as the number of acquired balls (ordinary winning ball addition number). The winning ball target switch and the winning ball number are determined based on the winning ball number data stored in the use area. Since the switches for the winning balls and the number of winning balls may differ depending on the model, this processing is processing dependent on the model.
Here, with regard to the winning prize opening, it is not necessary to calculate the number of winning balls since the big hit is excluded from the calculation of the base, but when it is desired to include the number of winning balls in small hits in normal times. The number of winning balls can also be calculated for the special winning opening.

Note that “the number of acquired balls”, “the number of emitted balls A” and “the number of emitted balls B” are all variables stored in the use area of the RAM 76.
Then, when this process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the number of fired balls.
When the "playing state" is "big hit", "time reduction" or "right-handed", the value of the number of fired balls is as follows.

When “out switch is detected”, “number A of fired balls” is “0” and “number B of fired balls” is “1”.
When “out switch is not detected”, “number A of fired balls” is “0” and “number B of fired balls” is “0”.

  When the “playing state” is “normally medium” or “deep state (latency certainty changing state)”, the value of the number of fired balls is the following value.

When “out switch is detected”, “number A of fired balls” is “1”, and “number of fired balls B” is “1”.
When “out switch is not detected”, “number A of fired balls” is “0” and “number B of fired balls” is “0”.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart of an example of a procedure of performance display monitor control processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S640: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for saving the stack pointer and all registers.

  Step S642: The main control CPU 72 executes an out-of-area RAM clear check process. This processing is processing outside the area. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the RAM used outside the area has been initialized, and executes initialization processing if it has not been initialized.

  Step S643: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H”, or “03H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S648. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S644.

  By executing such processing, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the original performance display monitor 200 from being executed when the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to, as in the processing outside the area called during the main loop. it can.

  During the setting change or while referring to the setting, the game can be stopped. In this case, the original process related to the performance display monitor 200 is not performed. For this reason, “out-of-area processing is not called during setting change or setting reference” may be used, but this is not adopted in this embodiment because the amount of code in the used area increases. That is, the code amount of the used area can be reduced by executing the process of determining whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being performed outside the area. As described above, the load on the main program can be reduced by not executing the process related to the performance display monitor 200 during setting change or setting reference.

  By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 may restrict the execution of at least a part of the other process during the execution of one of the setting-related process and the base-related process. Yes (restriction means). That is, when the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (step S643; Yes), the main control CPU 72 can prevent at least a part of the base related processing (step S644 and step S646) from being executed.

  Further, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (whether one of the processing is being executed), and the determination result is affirmative. Is determined to restrict execution of at least a part of the base-related process (the other process), and at least a part of the base-related process (the other process) if the determination result is negative It is possible to execute a determination process (determination process in step S643) for determining that the execution of is not limited (limitation unit).

  Furthermore, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 can execute determination processing (determination processing in step S643) as processing included in out-of-region processing (second processing) (second processing). Process execution means).

  Step S644: The main control CPU 72 executes a ball number addition process. This processing is processing outside the area. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 obtains the number of shot balls A (ordinary out addition number), the number of shot balls B (total out addition number) calculated in the “addition number calculation process” executed as the process in the use area, and the acquisition. Processing for adding the number of balls (ordinary prize ball addition number) to various counters arranged outside the area of the RAM 76 is executed.

  Specifically, the main control CPU 72 adds the number of shot balls A (normal out addition number) to the normal number of outs (normal out counter), and the number of shot balls B (total out number) to the total number of outs (total out counter). A process of adding an addition number, a process of adding an acquisition ball number (normal award ball addition number) to a normal award ball number (normal award ball number counter), etc. are executed. Details of the process will be described later.

  Step S646: The main control CPU 72 executes a performance display monitor display process. This processing is processing outside the area. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 performs blinking of the performance display monitor 200, change of display contents, and setting of display data. The display content is changed, for example, when “0.3 seconds on, 0.3 seconds on or off (flashing)” is repeated eight times (when a total of 4.8 seconds elapses). The contents to be switched are “the base currently being measured” and “the base of the previous 60,000 shots”.

  Then, the start of the division task (division processing) is set at the timing of the eighth "lighting or extinguishing" (when 4.5 seconds have elapsed from the display start). Thereafter, the division task is executed through the performance display monitor totaling division process called from the main loop process. The calculation in the division task ends at the latest when the display contents change (4.8 seconds after the start of display, 0.3 seconds after the start of the division task).

  In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for generating common output data for controlling lighting of the LEDs included in the performance display monitor 200 based on the base value.

  For example, when “the base of the current section is 30%”, the main control CPU 72 sets data corresponding to “bL.” As common output data (display data) in the common 0 and 1 buffers, and the common 2 , 3, a process of setting data corresponding to “30” as common output data (display data) is executed.

Step S648: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for restoring the stack pointer and all registers.
When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the ball number addition process.
Ball number addition processing is processing outside the region. The ball number addition process is called by the performance display monitor control process called by the timer interruption process. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S650: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the number of acquired balls (ordinary ball addition number) to the normal prize ball number counter (ordinary ball number). For example, when the value of the regular winning number counter is "100" and the value of the winning number is "8", the value of the normal winning number counter is "108".

  Step S652: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the number of firing balls A (normal out addition number) to the normal out counter (normal out number). For example, when the value of the normal out counter is "299" and the value of the number of fired balls A is "0", the value of the normal out counter is "299".

  Step S654: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the number of fired balls B (total out addition number) to the total out counter (total out number). For example, when the value of the total out counter is "299" and the value of the number of fired balls B is "1", the value of the total out counter is "300".

The “normal prize ball number counter”, the “normal out counter”, and the “total out counter” are variables stored in the RAM outside the area.
Further, the values of the “normal winning ball counter” and the “normal out counter” are used for calculation of the base, and the value of the “total out counter” is used for updating the counting section.
When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor control process (FIG. 65).

FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the performance display monitor tabulation division process.
The performance display monitor aggregation / division process is a process outside the area. The performance display monitor aggregation division process is called from the main loop process.

  Step S660: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the stack pointer and all the registers.

  Step S661: The main control CPU 72 executes out-of-area RAM clear check processing. This processing is processing outside the area. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the RAM used outside the area has been initialized, and executes initialization processing if it has not been initialized.

  Step S662a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H”, or “03H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S668. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S663.

  During the setting change or while referring to the setting, the game can be stopped. In this case, the original process related to the performance display monitor 200 is not performed. For this reason, “out-of-area processing is not called during setting change or setting reference” may be used, but this is not adopted in this embodiment because the amount of code in the used area increases. That is, the code amount of the used area can be reduced by executing the process of determining whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being performed outside the area. As described above, the load on the main program can be reduced by not executing the process related to the performance display monitor 200 during setting change or setting reference.

  In the game stop state, the "game stop flag" adopted in a so-called two-type machine type (game machine having a specific area) is also adopted in the one-type machine type, and during setting change and setting reference The transition can be made by setting the stop flag.

  By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 may restrict the execution of at least a part of the other process during the execution of one of the setting-related process and the base-related process. Yes (restriction means). That is, when the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (step S662a; Yes), the main control CPU 72 can not execute at least a part of the base related processing (steps S663 to S668).

  Further, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (whether one of the processing is being executed), and the determination result is affirmative. If it is determined that the execution of at least a part of the base related processing (the other processing) is limited, and if the determination result is negative, at least a part of the base related processing (the other processing) It is possible to execute a determination process (determination process in step S662a) for determining that the execution of is not limited (limitation unit).

  Furthermore, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 can execute determination processing (determination processing in step S662a) as processing included in out-of-region processing (second processing) (second processing). Process execution means).

  Step S663: The main control CPU 72 determines whether the section change (whether the section for displaying the base has shifted to a new section), ie, the value of the total number of outs (total out counter) is 60000. It is checked whether the value is larger than a value obtained by multiplying n by an integer and adding 300. Here, n is a value indicating the current section, and 1 is set as an initial value.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the section is changed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S664. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the section is changed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S666.

Step S664: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for storing the value of the normal winning ball number (normal winning ball number counter) and the value of the normal out number (normal out counter) in the dedicated buffer.
Further, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of updating by adding 1 to the value n indicating the current section.

  In this process, it is preferable not to save the base value. The reason for this is that when the total number of outs reaches a certain value (60000) and the display interval of the base is switched, “normal prize ball number ÷ regular out number × 100 rounding off” is stored and the result is stored However, the main control CPU 72 performs this calculation because it takes too much time. For this reason, in this processing, it is an optimal calculation method to execute only the processing for storing the number of normal winning balls and the number of normal outs and perform the calculation at an appropriate timing later. This is a calculation method based on the idea of “shortening the processing time in the worst case”, and is an important matter for stable operation of gaming machines, particularly pachinko machines. However, in this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of storing the value of the base (for example, a process of storing the value of the base calculated in step S667 described later as the value of the base of the previous section). It is also good.

Step S665: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to clear the value of the normal winning ball number and the value of the normal out number.
When this process is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes the process of step S668.

  Step S666: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for calculating the head address of the division task. By executing this processing, the main control CPU 72 can execute a calculation (processing such as division and subtraction) for calculating a base in the division task by a predetermined processing amount (for example, 1 bit).

As described above, since it takes time to execute the division process by the main control CPU 72, in the present embodiment, the division process is performed by being divided into several times.
Specifically, a table in which the start address shown below is stored is prepared, the start address of the module to be executed this time is calculated, and the address is set in the program counter (PC) to perform division processing slightly. It is executed one by one (divided into small pieces).

(1) Standby processing before division (first address)
(2) Division preparation process (start address of)
(3) Processing for obtaining the 64th place of the quotient (first address)
(4) Processing for obtaining the 32nd place of the quotient (first address)
(5) Processing for obtaining the 16th place of the quotient (first address)
(6) Processing for obtaining the eighth place of the quotient (first address)
(7) Processing to obtain the 4th place of the quotient (first address)
(8) Processing for obtaining the second place of the quotient (first address)
(9) Processing for obtaining the first place of the quotient (first address)
(10) Rounding off (first address)
(11) Wait process after the end of division (first address)
For example, the “standby process before division execution” in the above (1) is executed when “0” is set to the next task (next task determination status), and the “division preparation process in the above (2) “Is executed when“ 1 ”is set to the next task. By such a control process, the contents of the following division task can be executed little by little. The initial value of the next task is 0.

  Step S667: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of executing (invoking) a division task. This processing is processing outside the area. The division tasks include 11 tasks (division task 0 to division task 10), and division tasks 0 to 10 are called in order. The contents of the division task will be described later.

  By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 executes processing (base related processing) to calculate a base to be displayed on the performance display monitor 200 as processing included in processing outside the area (second processing). (2nd processing execution means). The base related processing includes at least one of processing required to calculate the base and processing required to display the base.

Step S668: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to restore the stack pointer and all the registers.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop processing (FIG. 16).

FIG. 68 is a flowchart of an exemplary procedure of the division task 1 process.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart of an example of a process of division tasks 2 to 8.
FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing an example of a process of the division task 9.
The division task has 0 to 10, and in the process of calculating the start address of the division task (S666), the value of the next task is referred to, and the start address of the division task to be actually executed is specified. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Here, the contents of the processing of the division task described below are explained in an example in which the calculation for calculating the base is performed one bit at a time, but the calculation for calculating the base is completed by one call. You may

  Further, after the completion of the base calculation, it may be monitored whether or not the RAM value outside the area is abnormal. Note that the start of the division task (start of the base calculation) may be set in the performance display monitor display process.

  If “0” is set to the next task, division task 0 is executed. The contents of the division task 0 are not particularly shown, but a standby process before the division is executed. In the final process of the division task 0, "1" is set to the next task.

If “1” is set to the next task, division task 1 shown in FIG. 68 is executed.
The flow of processing of the division task 1 will be described below.

  Step S730: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for initializing an integer (variable) to “128 (2 × 64)” and saving “128” in the integer buffer.

  Step S732: The main control CPU 72 loads the value of the out number, multiplies the loaded out value by the integer “128”, and saves the multiplied value as a divisor in the divisor buffer.

  Step S734: The main control CPU 72 loads the value of the normal prize ball number, multiplies the loaded normal prize ball number by “2” and “100”, and saves the multiplied value in the dividend buffer as the dividend. Run.

  Step S736: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of initializing the quotient to “0” and saving “0” in the quotient buffer.

  Step S738: The main control CPU 72 sets “2” for the next task.

  When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor aggregation division processing (FIG. 67).

When “2” to “8” are set as the next task, division tasks 2 to 8 shown in FIG. 69 are executed.
Hereinafter, the flow of processing of the division tasks 2 to 8 will be described.

  Step S740: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the dividend saved in the dividend buffer is equal to or larger than the divisor saved in the divisor buffer.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the dividend saved in the dividend buffer is equal to or greater than the divisor saved in the divisor buffer (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S742. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the dividend saved in the dividend buffer is greater than or equal to the divisor saved in the divisor buffer (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S746.

  Step S742: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the divisor saved in the divisor buffer from the dividend saved in the dividend buffer, and executes processing for saving the subtraction result in the dividend buffer as a new dividend.

  Step S744: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for adding the integer stored in the integer buffer to the quotient saved in the quotient buffer and saving the addition result as a new quotient in the quotient buffer.

  Step S746: The main control CPU 72 divides the divisor saved in the divisor buffer by “2” (shifts it to the right by 1 bit), and executes processing to save the division result in the divisor buffer as a new divisor.

  Step S748: The main control CPU 72 divides the integer saved in the integer buffer by “2” (shifts one bit to the right), and saves the division result as a new integer in the integer buffer.

  Step S750: The main control CPU 72 sets a value obtained by adding 1 to the current task (the value of the current next task) as the next task.

  When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor aggregation division processing (FIG. 67).

If “9” is set as the next task, division task 9 shown in FIG. 70 is executed.
The flow of processing of the division task 9 will be described below.

  Step S752: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for confirming whether or not the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is “1”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is “1” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S754. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is “1” (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S756.

  Step S754: The main control CPU 72 divides the quotient stored in the quotient buffer by 2 (shifts it to the right by 1 bit), adds 1 to the division result, and stores the result in the base buffer. .

  Step S756: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of dividing the quotient stored in the quotient buffer by “2” (shifting one bit to the right) and storing the result of division in the base buffer.

  Step S758: The main control CPU 72 sets “10 (value corresponding to standby processing)” for the next task.

  When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor aggregation division processing (FIG. 67).

  When “10” is set to the next task, the division task 10 is executed. Although the contents of the division task 10 are not particularly shown, a standby process after the division is executed is executed. In the final process of the division task 10, “0” is set to the next task.

  Next, the display mode of the performance display monitor 200 and the calculation method of the base (base ratio) displayed on the performance display monitor 200 will be described.

FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the performance display monitor 200.
When the gaming state is the low probability non-time shortening state, the main control device 70 displays the base when the high probability non-time shortening state and the left hitting instruction are being displayed on the performance display monitor 200. Here, the base is calculated for each preset section (for example, every 60000 total number of outs). The base (percentage:%) can be calculated by base = normal number of winning balls / normal number of outs × 100.

  As shown in (A) and (B) in FIG. 71, in the performance display monitor 200, the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are switched at preset intervals (for example, several seconds). Is displayed.

  In the performance display monitor 200, the seven segments 201 and 202 display an identifier "bL." Or "b6." For identifying whether it is the base of the current section or the base of the previous section. In the performance display monitor 200, the 7-segments 203 and 204 display the base corresponding to the identifier “bL.” Or “b6.” As 2-digit numerical information.

  For example, assuming that the base of the current section is 30%, when displaying the base of the current section, “bL.” Is displayed in the 7 segments 201 and 202 as shown in FIG. Then, “30” is displayed in the 7 segments 203 and 204. Further, assuming that the base of the previous section is 38%, when displaying the base of the previous section, “b6.” Is displayed on the seven segments 201 and 202 as shown in (B) in FIG. Then, “38” is displayed in the 7 segments 203 and 204.

FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining a section of the base displayed on the performance display monitor 200.
Here, from the time the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured to the time when it is installed in the hall (game hall) and a game is played by the player, inspections at the time of manufacture, trial operation (operation check) in the hall, etc. are performed. It will be. The game balls will be fired and discharged even during such inspections at the time of manufacture and trial operation in the hall, but if the number of balls out and the number of discharges during this period are counted, the game is played by the player It may not be possible to calculate the base accurately while

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72A, the first section (non-target section) in which the total number of out balls detected by the out switch 99 (total number) is 0 to 300 is an inspection at the time of manufacture, The base is considered to be the number of out balls detected before a game is played by a player, such as a trial run in a hall, and the base is excluded from the target for calculating.

  Similarly, the number of payouts paid out in a section where the number of out balls is 0 to 300 is also excluded from the targets for which the base is calculated. In this non-target section, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), when displaying the base of the current section, the identifier “bL.” Is displayed blinking and “−−” is used as the base value. Lights up. Since the previous section does not exist, when displaying the base of the previous section, the identifier “b6.” Is blinked and “−−” is lit and displayed as the base value.

  Then, with the number of out spheres ranging from 301 to 60,300 as the first section, the base is calculated as needed (in real time) in the first section, and when displaying the base of the current section, the identifier "bL." Is displayed, and the calculated base value is lit. At this time, when calculating the base of the current section, the identifier “bL.” Is displayed in a blinking manner while the number of out balls is from 301 to 6299 (while the number of out balls in the section is 5999 or less). Notify that there are few samples and the base is not stable. After that, when the number of out balls becomes 6300 or more (the number of out balls in the section becomes 6000 or more), the identifier “bL.” Is lit to display many samples when calculating the base of the current section. , To inform that the base is stable.

  In addition, since the previous section does not exist in the first section, when displaying the base of the previous section, the identifier "b6." Is displayed flickering and "-" is lit as the value of the base. indicate.

  In addition, in the second interval where the out sphere number is 60301 to 120300, the base is calculated as needed (in real time) as in the first interval, and the out sphere number is displayed when displaying the base of the current interval In response to this, the identifier "bL." Is displayed in a lit or blinking manner, and the calculated base is displayed. Further, when displaying the base of the previous section in the second section, the identifier “b6.” Is lit and displayed, and the final base of the first section is lit and displayed.

  In this way, the base calculated in real time is displayed as the base of the current section every 60000 (every nth section) excluding the first 300 out spheres, and the n-1st section The final base of is displayed as the base of the previous section.

  As a result, it is possible to exclude the number of out balls and the number of discharges before the game is performed by the player, such as inspection at the time of manufacture and trial operation (operation check) in the hall, from the target for calculating the base. It can be calculated (displayed) accurately.

  When calculating the base, the base may temporarily exceed 100%. For example, when the first ball of the section enters the middle starting winning opening 26, the number of balls out is 1, whereas the number of payouts is obtained by entering the middle starting winning opening 26. It will be a number (eg 4) and the base will be 400%. In such a case, the performance display monitor 200 can display the base only with two-digit numerical information, so that “99.” is lit to notify that the base exceeds 100%.

FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining a base calculation method.
Here, a method of calculating the base on the assumption that the number of normal prize balls is “3456” and the number of normal outs is “10000” will be described.

  As described above, the base is a value obtained by finally converting the number of discharges with respect to the number of out balls for each section into a percentage. When such percentage display is performed, only two digits after the decimal point are required for the division result.

  The process of calculating such percentage values (the process of “converting in%”) corresponds to multiplying the multiplicand “100”. Therefore, it can be expressed by the following formula: base = number of regular prize balls ÷ number of regular out × 100. However, when the number of normal prize balls is equal to or less than the number of normal outs, if the calculation is performed according to the order of this formula, the value becomes a value after the decimal point, and the calculation cannot be performed by the main controller 70, for example.

  Therefore, the calculation order is changed, and the calculation is performed in the order of base = normal prize ball number × 100 ÷ normal out number (firstly, the normal prize ball number is multiplied by the multiplicand and thereafter divided by the normal out number). By doing so, it is possible to complete the calculation result with only the integer without performing the calculation after the decimal point.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the value after the decimal point at the time of converting into a percentage is rounded off.
However, since main controller 70 can not handle numbers below the decimal point and computations are performed in binary numbers, the normal prize sphere number × multiplicand "100" and the normal out number are doubled first and the base 2 Find the double value. If the least significant bit (equivalent to the value after the decimal point) of the value twice the binary value (binary number) is “1” (if the decimal point is 0.5 or more), After adding “1” to the double value, the value after the decimal point is rounded up by half the value (shifted to the right by 1 bit), and the least significant bit of the double value obtained (corresponding to the value after the decimal point) If the value of “0” is “0” (if the decimal part is less than 0.5), the decimal part is truncated by setting the double value of the obtained base to a half value (shift to the right) as it is. This allows rounding off the value after the decimal point.

  Specifically, in main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), the division is replaced by subtraction, and a dividend “691200”, which is 2 × normal prize ball number (3456) × 100, a divisor “10000” which is the normal out number Is subtracted from a number obtained by multiplying a predetermined integer “128 (2 × 2 raised to the sixth power)” by multiplying the power of 2 by 2, and thereafter, the integer is changed from “64 (2 × 2 raised to the fifth power)” → “32 (2 × 2 fourth power) → “16 (2 × 2 third power)” → “8 (2 × 2 second power)” → “4 (2 × 2 first power)” → “2 (2 power X2 to the 0th power) → 1 (2 × 2 to the −1th power) in order (shifted to the right by 1 bit), multiplied by the divisor, and subtracted from the dividend. Here, the integer that multiplies the divisor starts from 2 × 64 when the display of the base is in the range of 0 to 99, and “99.9” is displayed when the base is 100% or more. Therefore, it is not necessary to subtract a numerical value equal to or larger than “2 × 128 (2 to the seventh power)”.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73, since the dividend is less than the divisor in the first calculation, the process proceeds to the next. Then, in the second operation, since dividend ≧ divisor, the divisor "64 (2 x 32) x 10000" is subtracted from the dividend "69 1200" to update the dividend to "51200" and the quotient "0" is "64". And update the quotient to “64 (1000000 B in binary notation)”. In the third to fifth calculations, dividend is less than divisor, so the process proceeds to the next. In the sixth operation, since dividend ≧ divisor, the divisor "4 (2 x 2) x 10000" is subtracted from the dividend "51 200" to update the dividend to "11 200" and the quotient "64" is "4". In addition, the quotient is updated to “68 (1000100B in binary number)”. In the seventh calculation, since dividend is less than divisor, the process proceeds to the next. In the eighth operation, since dividend ≧ divisor, the divisor "1 (2 x 0.5) x 10000" is subtracted from the dividend "11 200" to update the dividend to "1200", and the quotient "68" is changed to "1". And the quotient is updated to "69 (1000101 B in binary notation)".

  Thereafter, in the ninth calculation, the updated quotient “69 (1000101B in binary number)” is divided by 2 (shifted to the right by 1 bit) to obtain the final base. At this time, the quotient becomes “34.5” simply by dividing by 2, but since the main control unit 70 can not handle the decimal part as described above, the least significant bit of the quotient is “1 B” After the quotient "69" is shifted to the right by one bit, "1" is added to make the quotient "35 (0100011 B in binary notation)".

  According to such an operation example, division can be realized by only simple operations such as addition, subtraction, and multiplication, and by integers only. Here, it is sufficient to repeat the calculation nine times, so that the calculation process can be performed quickly. In addition, the base can be rounded off.

[Setting related processing basic operation]
74 to 76 are timing charts showing the setting related processing basic operation.

FIG. 74 shows an example in which processing concerning setting reference (mode for confirming setting) is performed.
FIG. 75 shows an example in which processing concerning setting change (mode for changing setting) is performed.
FIG. 76 shows an example when an abnormality occurs in the RAM.

Moreover, (A) in each figure shows the state of ON or OFF of the power supply.
In each figure, (B) indicates the ON or OFF state of the setting key.
(C) in each figure shows the ON or OFF state of the RAM clear switch 304.
(D) in each figure shows the ON or OFF state of the setting switch. When the RAM clear switch 304 is also used as the setting change switch, either one of (C) or (D) in each figure is omitted, or (C) and each in each figure are omitted. It is possible to combine (D) in the figure.

(E) in each figure shows the content displayed on the performance display monitor 200.
In each figure, (F) shows the ON or OFF state of external information (for example, a security signal).
(G) in each figure shows the content displayed on the error display (for example, the liquid crystal display 42).
(H) in each figure shows the change of the gaming state.
In each figure, (I) shows the state of the switch.

[Refer setting]
74 (A): The power supply is OFF at time t1, and the power supply is ON at time t3.

  (B) in FIG. 74: The setting key is turned on at time t2, and the setting key is turned off at time t6. From time t6 to time t7, the setting key needs to be OFF, but after time t7, the setting key may be ON or OFF.

  (C) in FIG. 74: The RAM clear switch is off from time t1 to time t5. After time t5, the RAM clear switch may be ON or OFF.

  In FIG. 74 (D): The setting switch is off from time t1 to time t3. After time t3, the setting switch may be ON or OFF.

  (E) in FIG. 74: The performance display monitor 200 is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. From time t5 to time t7, the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value. The performance display monitor 200 displays the base after time t7.

  In FIG. 74 (F): The external information is off from time t1 to time t3. The external information is ON from time t3 to time t6. The external information is off after time t6. The ON state of the external information may be extended until time t7. External information may be output at least for a certain time (50 ms).

  In (G) in FIG. 74, the error display is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. The error display is a setting reference display from time t5 to time t6. In the setting reference display, for example, character information “Setting reference is being displayed” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The error display is not displayed after time t6. The setting reference display may be extended until time t7. The external information and error display period are the same as the setting reference end period, but it is not necessary to match. The setting reference end period is a processing time required to shift from the setting reference end to the normal game. The shortest time to complete the setting reference can be set to 0 ms.

  In (H) in FIG. 74, the gaming state is interrupted in the period from time t1 to time t3. The gaming state is activated from time t3 to time t4. From time t4 to time t5, the gaming state is switch confirmation. The gaming state is a setting reference from time t5 to time t6. From time t6 to time t7, the gaming state is the end of setting reference. After time t7, the gaming state is a normal game.

  In FIG. 74 (I): From time t1 to time t4, the states of the switches are all invalid. The state of the switch from time t4 to time t7 is invalid except for the switch related to the setting change device. After time t7, all switches are valid.

〔setting change〕
In FIG. 75 (A): the power is off at time t1, and the power is on at time t3.

  (B) in FIG. 75: The setting key is turned on at time t2, and the setting key is turned off at time t6. From time t6 to time t7, the setting key needs to be OFF, but after time t7, the setting key may be ON or OFF.

  (C) in FIG. 75: The RAM clear switch is off from time t1 to time t3. The RAM clear switch is ON from time t3 to time t5. After time t5, the RAM clear switch may be ON or OFF. Note that the RAM clear switch may be ON (may be pressed) at time t2 as with the setting key.

  In FIG. 75 (D): The setting switch is off from time t1 to time t3. The setting switch may be ON or OFF from time t3 to time t5. Each time the setting switch is pressed from time t5 to time t6, the setting switch is turned on. After time t6, the setting switch may be ON or OFF.

  In FIG. 75 (E): the performance display monitor 200 is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. From time t5 to time t7, the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value. The performance display monitor 200 displays the base after time t7.

  In FIG. 75 (F): The external information is off from time t1 to time t3. The external information is ON from time t3 to time t6. The external information is off from time t6 to time t8. The ON state of the external information may be extended until time t7. The external information is ON from time t8 to time t9. The external information is off after time t9. External information may be output at least for a certain time (50 ms). External information (security / initialization) output from time t8 to time t9 may be output for a certain time (50 ms) or more, and external information may be output continuously depending on the output timing of the external information. .

(G) in FIG. 75: The error display is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. The error display is a setting change display from time t5 to time t6. In the setting change display, for example, the character information “setting change in progress” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The error display is not displayed from time t6 to time t7. The setting change display may be extended to time t7. The error display is an initialization display from time t7 to time t10. The initialization display is, for example, to display character information “initialization completed.” On the liquid crystal display 42. The error display is not displayed after time t10.
The external information and error display period is the same as the setting change end period, but it is not necessary to match them. The period for the end of the setting change is a processing time necessary for shifting from the end of the setting change to the normal game. The shortest time for completing the setting change can be set to 0 ms.

  In (H) in FIG. 75, the gaming state is interrupted in the period from time t1 to time t3. The gaming state is activated from time t3 to time t4. From time t4 to time t5, the gaming state is switch confirmation. The gaming state is a setting change from time t5 to time t6. From time t6 to time t7, the gaming state is the end of setting change. After time t7, the gaming state is a normal game.

In FIG. 75, (I): From time t1 to time t4, all the switches are disabled. From time t4 to time t7, the state of the switch is invalid except for the switch related to the setting change device. After time t7, all switches are valid.
It is preferable to execute the RAM clear from time t5 to time t7.

[When RAM is abnormal]
In (A) in FIG. 76, the power is off at time t1, and the power is on at time t3.

  (B) in FIG. 76: The setting key is OFF at time t1. After time t1, the setting key may be ON or OFF.

(C) in FIG. 76: The RAM clear switch is OFF at time t1. After time t1, the RAM clear switch may be ON or OFF.
The setting key and the RAM clear switch may be shifted to the setting change state if the transition condition to the setting change is satisfied.

  (D) in FIG. 76: The setting switch is OFF at time t1. After the time t1, the setting switch may be ON or OFF.

  (E) in FIG. 76: The performance display monitor 200 is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. After time t5, the performance display monitor 200 displays the content corresponding to the error.

  In FIG. 76 (F): The external information is off from time t1 to time t5. The external information is ON after time t5.

  In (G) in FIG. 76, the error display is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. After time t5, the error display indicates that the game is stopped. The game-stopping display is, for example, to display on the liquid crystal display 42 character information of "error occurring." Or "game stopped."

  In (H) in FIG. 76, the gaming state is interrupted in the period from time t1 to time t3. The gaming state is activated from time t3 to time t4. From time t4 to time t5, the gaming state is switch confirmation. After time t5, the game state is game stop.

  In FIG. 76 (I): From time t1 to time t4, the states of the switches are all invalid. The state of the switch from time t4 to time t7 is invalid except for the switch related to the setting change device. After time t5, all switches are invalid.

In addition to the basic configuration of the above timing chart, the following modification is also possible.
(1) As a transition condition to the setting change state (setting change mode) or the setting reference state (setting reference mode), a condition “inner frame is open” is also set. The setting change state or the setting reference state ends when the frame closing continues for a fixed time (100 ms continues).
(1a) The setting change state or the setting reference state may be ended when the setting key OFF state continues for a certain time (for example, 100 ms) without considering the state of the inner frame.

(2) When the RAM clear switch is pressed in the setting key OFF state, the setting confirmation state (setting change state) or the setting reference state ends.

(3) Before starting the setting reference, a power recovery process is performed. When the checksum or the like is abnormal, the RAM is cleared. Even in this case, the setting change flag, the set value, and the outside of the area are not cleared.
(3a) When the checksum is abnormal, the setting changing flag, the setting value, and the memory outside the area may be cleared to set the RAM abnormal error state.

(4) When the setting change or the setting reference condition is satisfied, the setting changing flag is set. In this case, the setting change flag is set in the initial flow (for example, CPU initialization process), and the setting change or the setting change flag is changed based on the contents of the setting change flag during execution of the timer interrupt process after entering the main loop. Execute processing of setting reference.

(5) When the setting change is completed, the process jumps to the top of the program (for example, CPU initialization processing), generates a checksum error, and clears the RAM other than the setting value.

(6) Immediately after the setting is confirmed, the game becomes ready (transition to the normal game state). That is, there is no condition that the RAM is cleared again after the setting is determined, or that the predetermined time has elapsed before the transition to the normal game.
(6a) For reasons such as preparation of an effect control device, only a predetermined time may be used as a condition.

(7) During the setting change, the game stop flag is set so that the process relating to the game is not performed.
(8) During main game and setting change, common main loop processing and common timer interrupt processing are used during setting reference.

(9) A common timer interrupt during normal game, during setting change, and during setting reference is at least one of dynamic port output processing, port input processing, external information management processing, and port output processing.

(10) During main game and setting change, different main loop processing and separate timer interrupt processing are used during setting reference.
(11) A timer interrupt by the first timer (timer 0) is used during normal game, and a timer interrupt by the second timer (timer 1) is used during setting change and setting reference. The interrupt cycle may be the same or may vary.

(12) The same RAM clear switch and setting change switch are used (shared).
(13) Separate RAM clear switch and setting change switch are used (not shared).

The following is a variation on the security signal.
(14) The security signal is output only during the setting change, and is not output during the setting reference.
(15) A security signal is output during setting change and setting reference, and the output time is varied. For example, a security signal is output for 30 seconds during setting change, and a security signal is output for 5 seconds during setting reference.

(16) While changing the setting, both the security signal and the out signal are output.
(17) A “setting change signal” is newly added, and while the setting is changed, the “setting change signal” newly added is output.

(18) One of the existing signals (big hit signal 4 and the like) is used as a setting change signal and is not used in the conventional application.
(19) While changing the setting, the "security signal" and the "setting change signal" are output.

(20) A security signal is output every time a setting change switch (RAM clear switch) is pressed during setting change.
(21) Start security signal output when setting is confirmed. When the setting is determined, the output of the security signal is ended.

(22) At the time of setting confirmation, the pulse of the setting change signal is output for the setting number of times (for example, the number of pressing times of the setting change switch, the number of times corresponding to the setting value after confirmation).
(23) If the setting key is ON during the normal game (if the setting key is turned), a security signal is output.

[Example of processing at power-on]
FIG. 77 to FIG. 79 are diagrams showing an example of processing when the power is turned on.

FIG. 77 shows a first processing example in the case where the previous power interruption is a normal game and the RAM is normal (the backup flag is normal) when the power is restored.
FIG. 78 shows a second processing example in the case where the previous power-off is in setting reference and the RAM is normal at the time of power restoration.
FIG. 79 shows a third processing example when the RAM is abnormal (the backup flag is abnormal) when the power is restored regardless of the previous power-off state.

  As shown in FIG. 77, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the contents of the memory (RAM 76) are cleared except for the data related to the setting related process and the performance display monitor related process. (2) After the power is turned on, the state changes to the setting change state. (3) The performance display monitor 200 displays the set value.

  Also, if the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, (5) transition to the setting reference state after power on, and (6) performance display The monitor 200 displays the setting value.

  Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory clear other than the data related to setting related processing and performance display monitor related processing, and (8) after the power is turned on. Is shifted to the normal gaming state, and (9) the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

  Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, and (11) after the power is turned on, the game is shifted to the normal gaming state. (12) Performance The display monitor 200 displays the base.

  As shown in FIG. 78, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the contents of the memory (RAM 76) are cleared except for the data related to the setting related process and the performance display monitor related process. (2) After the power is turned on, the state changes to the setting change state. (3) The performance display monitor 200 displays the set value.

  Also, if the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, (5) transition to the setting reference state after power on, and (6) performance display The monitor 200 displays the setting value.

  Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory clear other than the data related to setting related processing and performance display monitor related processing, and (8) after the power is turned on. Is shifted to the normal gaming state, and (9) the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

  Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, and (11) after the power is turned on, the setting reference state or the normal gaming state is entered. (12) The performance display monitor 200 displays the set value or base. In case of shifting to the setting reference state in the above (11), it is preferable to display the setting value in the above (12), and in the case of shifting to the normal gaming state in the above (11), the base in the above (12) It is preferable to display.

  As shown in FIG. 79, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the contents of the memory (RAM 76) are cleared except for the data related to the performance display monitor related processing, and (2 ) After the power is turned on, the state changes to the setting change state. (3) The performance display monitor 200 displays the set value. In the above (1), when the RAM has an abnormal value, data related to the performance display monitor related processing may be cleared.

  When the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, (5) after the power is turned on, the game is shifted to the stop state, and (6) performance display. The monitor 200 displays an error code (for example, “E” display).

  Further, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory are not changed, (8) after the power is turned on, the game is stopped, and (9) performance display The monitor 200 displays an error code.

  Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, and (11) after the power is turned on, the game is shifted to the stop state. (12) Performance The display monitor 200 displays an error code.

  And the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can perform the process of the content described in FIGS. 74-79 by the main control apparatus 70 or the presentation control apparatus 124. FIG. The contents of the processing described in FIGS. 74 to 79 may not be executed depending on the model.

[Launch position management processing]
FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the launch position management process. Each step will be described below.

  Step S1100: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the values of the normal game management phase are “03H” to “07H”.

[Normal game management phase]
The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the normal game management phase (in the brackets) according to the game progress statuses (1) to (8) corresponding to the normal symbols as follows.
(1) Normal symbol change waiting state: "00H"
(2) Normal symbol variation display state: "01H"
(3) Normal symbol stop symbol display state: "02H"
(4) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) waiting to be opened: “03H”
(5) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) open state: “04H”
(7) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) closed state: “05H”
(8) Variable start winning device (normal electric role) during operation end time state: "06H"
(9) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric equipment) after closing: “07H”

  Here, when the value of the normal game management phase is set or updated, the main control CPU 72 generates a normal game management phase command reflecting the value. The normal game management phase command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the normal game management phase is “03H” to “07H” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1140. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the value of the normal game management phase is “03H” to “07H” (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1110.

  Step S1110: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the values of the special game management phase are “03H” to “07H”.

[Special Game Management Phase]
The main control CPU 72 sets the value (in brackets) of the special game management phase according to, for example, the following according to the progress status (1) to (8) of the game corresponding to the special symbol.
(1) Special symbol change waiting condition: "00H"
(2) Special symbol variation display status: "01H"
(3) Special symbol stop symbol display state: “02H”
(4) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) waiting to be opened: “03H”
(5) Variable winning device (special electric symbol) open state: "04H"
(6) Variable winning device (special motorized symbol) closed state: "05H"
(7) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) during operation end state: “06H”
(8) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) effective after closing: “07H”

  Here, when the value of the special game management phase is set or updated, the main control CPU 72 generates a special game management phase command reflecting the value. The special game management phase command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is "03H" to "07H", that is, it is in the big hit game or the small hit game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1140. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the value of the special game management phase is "03H" to "07H" (No), that is, if it is not possible to confirm that the big hit game or the small hit game is being played, the main control CPU 72 performs step Execute S1120.

  Step S1120: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is a time reduction state. It can be confirmed by the time shortening function operation flag whether it is in the time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1140. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the time shortening state (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S1130.

  Step S1130: The main control CPU 72 sets a value (0) corresponding to left-handed to the firing position designation status.

Here, the “firing position designation status” is a variable that holds whether the current gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to left-handed or a gaming state corresponding to right-handed.
Specifically, if “0” is set in the launch position designation status, it indicates that the current gaming state is the gaming state (left strike state) corresponding to the left strike, and the launch position designation status is “1 "" Indicates that the current gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to right-handed (right-handed state).

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can confirm whether the current gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to left-handed or a gaming state corresponding to right-handed by referring to the value of the launch position designation status. it can.
Further, the value of the firing position designation status is stored in the RAM 76, and when a power-off state occurs, the value is backed up.

  Step S1140: The main control CPU 72 sets a value (1) corresponding to right-handed as the launch position designation status.

  Step S1150: When the launch position designation status is set in step S1130 or step S1140, the main control CPU 72 next generates a launch position designation command (launch position designation information notification means). Here, the main control CPU 72 generates a command reflecting the value of the launch position designation status as the launch position designation command. Specifically, when the value of the firing position designation status is a value (0) indicating left-handed, the main control CPU 72 generates a firing position designation command indicating left-handed. On the other hand, when the value of the launch position designation status is a value (1) indicating a right strike, the main control CPU 72 generates a launch position designation command indicating a right strike. The firing position designation command generated here is output to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

[Game flow in non-time-shortened state]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the game flow in the non-time-shortened state.

  When starting a game with a pachinko machine, the game is started from the [F0] non-time shortening state [F1] normal mode. In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is "low probability state". Thus, since [F1] normal mode is "low probability non-time shortening state", by making the game ball enter the middle start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to change and the game is proceed.

  [F0] Non-time shortening states include [F2] festival mode in addition to [F1] normal mode. [F2] Festival mode is a low probability or high probability non-time shortening state.

  [F2] In the festival mode, when the [F3] defined condition (for example, the condition that the special symbol has changed 10 times in the low probability non-time shortened state) is satisfied, the mode is shifted to the [F1] normal mode.

  In [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, if [F4] corresponds to “11 round normal symbol” or “11 round positive odd symbol 11”, [F5] 11 round big hit game (challenge bonus) is executed, [F6] The treasure challenge effect is performed [F7] failure effect is executed, and it shifts to the [F2] festival mode.

  [F6] Treasure challenge effect is a probability change promotion Judge effect executed using the first to tenth fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game.

  [F1] In the normal mode or [F2] festival mode, when it corresponds to [F8] “11 round odd symbol 1 to 10”, [F5] 14 round big hit game (challenge bonus) is executed, and [F6] treasure challenge [F9] Successful production is executed in the production, and [F10] Fireworks rush is entered. [F10] The fireworks rush is in a high probability time shortened state.

  In the [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, when it corresponds to [F11] “15 round odd symbol 1”, the [F12] 15 round big hit game (special bonus) is executed, and as it is [F10] fireworks rush Transition. In this case, [F6] treasure challenge effect is not executed.

  In the [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, when it corresponds to [F13] “six rounds odd symbol” or “eight rounds odd symbol”, a mode transition effect is executed with a six round big hit game or an eight round big hit game [F10] Fireworks rush as it is.

[Game flow in time saving state]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the game flow in the time reduction state.

  The [G0] time shortening state is roughly divided into [G1] fireworks rush (high probability time shortening state) and [G2] coast mode (low probability time shortening state).

  [G1] A battle reach effect performed during [G4] variation display when it corresponds to [G3] “15 round probability variation symbols 2 to 7” or “3 round probability variation symbols” in [G1] fireworks rush or [G2] coast mode [G5] Victory effect is executed, [G6] After the 15 round big hit game (fireworks bonus) is over, [G1] Fireworks rush is entered.

  On the other hand, in [G1] fireworks rush or [G2] coast mode, if it corresponds to [G7] “5 round normal symbol”, [G8] defeat effect is executed in battle reach effect executed during [G4] fluctuation display Then, after the end of [G9] 5 round jackpot game (normal bonus), it shifts to [G2] coast mode.

In addition, when [G1] fireworks rush or [G2] coast mode, if [G10] corresponds to [5 round probability variation symbol], [G8] defeat effect is executed in battle reach effect executed during [G4] fluctuation display However, during the execution of the [G9] 5 round big hit game (normal bonus), [G11] after the end of the big hit game [G11] major role promotion effect (reverse production, resurrection production, definite change promotion production is executed), [G1] Transition to fireworks rush.
Note that the above-described game flow is an example of a representative game flow and does not cover all the game flow.

[Example of effect image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described by giving some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect symbols include, for example, three left effect symbols, middle effect symbols and right effect symbols, which are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is, for example, a design of a picture tag to which a character is attached together with numerals "1" to "9". Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all constitute a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such symbol rows are displayed fluctuatingly so as to flow (scrolling) in the vertical direction in the left area, the middle area and the right area on the screen.

  FIG. 83 is a continuous diagram showing examples of effect images corresponding to the change display and stop display of special symbols. Note that, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (losing). This variation display effect is a line between the time when the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but also the second special symbol) starts the variable display and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of effects that are In addition, the stop display effect is an effect representing that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of the effect symbols. Here, first, before describing the specific content of the control process, a basic flow of the variable display effect for each fluctuation and the stop display effect adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuating display]
83 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also in the state of being stopped.

[Memory number indication production]
Further, in the pre-change display area X1 at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (represented by reference numerals M1 and M2 in the figure) indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. The markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of displayed memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively (the number of display of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a) The number of displays increases or decreases in conjunction with the change in the number of operating memories during the game.

  Also, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, for example, as a circle (o) to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed in the form of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (indicated by broken lines). This indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is zero.

  Further, during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (with reference symbols Z1 and Z2 in the drawing) is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are the "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle and right effects symbols, and are variably displayed in synchronization with the variation symbols of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely simple colors (for example, a figure of “□”) with a color, and for example, it is possible to express variable display by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is properly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is, for example, "15 round big hit" instead of "off", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, red display color) corresponding to them. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 may not be displayed on the liquid crystal screen, but may be displayed by LEDs arranged on the board.

[Variation display production start]
(B) in FIG. 83: For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation display effect is started by scroll fluctuation of three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (effect execution means). That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the left display symbol, the middle display symbol and the row of the right display symbol scroll vertically (flow) in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Production begins. The markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the band-shaped pre-variation display area X1 in the lower portion of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the change, but after the start of the change, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the lower left part of the liquid crystal display 42 The display moves to the changing display area X2 based on the pedestal image, and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (the changing memory display effect). In the figure, the effect symbol variation display is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, by displaying (transparent display) the individual effect pattern in a transparent state, it is displayed in a state where the image (background image) serving as the background of the effect pattern is easily visible at this time on the display screen. It is done.

  The background image in this case is, for example, a scene in which a female character dressed in a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if it is cool in the evening. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the time shortening function is inoperative and the probability fluctuation function is also inoperative. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal "time reduction state" or corresponds to the "high probability state". Although not particularly illustrated here, after that, for example, an image such as a character or an item may be displayed on the display screen to perform a notice effect.

  In addition, during the variable display of the production symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing its display color.

[Left symbol stop]
(C) in FIG. 83: For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design pattern first stops fluctuation. In this example, it is represented that the effect pattern representing the numeral "8" has stopped at the left position of the screen. In addition, illustration of a background image is abbreviate | omitted here (the same also after this).

[Example of effect when working memory number decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) in FIG. 83 above, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M1 interlocks with it. It is reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memories so far, only the oldest (oldest) memory number display in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effects consumed by the internal lottery are combined. To be done. As a result, the player can be taught that the number of stored working memories has been consumed for the first special symbol.

  In the example of (C) in FIG. 83, since the marker M1 at the head in the storage order moves to the changing display area X2, the display in the display area X1 before change becomes three. There is an effect in which the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (here, leftward) by one. As a result, the front-rear relationship of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed in the production, and the fact that the working memory is consumed and reduced by one for the player or that the working memory is consumed and the special symbol Can be taught intuitively and intelligibly.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 83 (D): Following the left effect design, the right effect design stops changing thereafter. In this example, it indicates that the effect design symbol representing the numeral "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. With "slip pattern", for example, once the production design symbol representing the number "7" is stopped, the production design symbol representing the number "8" is stopped by sliding one design part of the symbol row, thereby developing into reach It is something to do. Alternatively, once the production design symbol representing the numeral "9" is stopped, the design pattern representing the numeral "8" is stopped by sliding one symbol in the opposite direction to the pattern row in the reverse direction, and the pattern developed to reach by this also. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and then a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “8” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop indication effect]
In FIG. 83 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the stop display effect is also performed in the non-winning (missing) mode. It will be. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. As it is a breakout point, it is expressed on the effect that the current variation corresponds to the usual "dropout". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has been moved to the changing display area X2 and has been continuously displayed is also hidden. Therefore, it can be intuitively and easily instructed to the player that “the variation of the special symbol has ended”.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for winning and finally to clearly teach the result of the internal lottery on the effect.

  Further, although the example described above is for the non-winning case, after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect at the time of the big hit (winning), in the stop display effect, the production symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol internally selected by the main control CPU 72 (the stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) Selected.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
FIG. 84 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the reach effect performed at the time of the big hit (winning). In the case of a big hit, different effects can be executed according to the winning symbol. Here, in addition to the reach effect, it is assumed that the variable display effect, the stop display effect and the notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach effect) to be executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  The following reach effects are, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs a variation display based on the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, and then the first special symbol has a big hit (for example, “Self”, “Yo” of the 7-segment LED) , “Mouth”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc.), and so on (reach effect execution means). In addition, in FIG. 84, each rendering symbol is simplified and shown only to a number. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of presentation. Moreover, although the following reach effects are normal reach effects, a super reach effect (not shown) different from the following reach effects may be executed depending on the selected variation pattern.

[Variable display effect]
(A) in FIG. 84: For example, on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the left rendering symbol, the middle rendering symbol and the row of the right rendering symbol are in the vertical direction (for example, from above The variable display effect is started by scrolling down).

[Notice production before reach occurrence (the first stage)]
84 (B): Next, at a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, a first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The design image used for the advance notice of this reach occurrence is located in front of the effect design that is variably displayed on the screen, and is displayed, for example, as appearing from the left edge of the screen (other appearances May be). Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such “reach advance notice production”, an effect of having the player a sense of expectation that “the reach may be developed = the possibility of a big hit is increased” can be obtained.

[Notice production before reach occurrence (the second stage)]
84 (C): After the first stage aspect of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach notice effect progresses to the second stage. Here, as the advance notice production before reaching the second stage reach, production using a pattern image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  The pre-reach advance notice production (second stage) using such a second design image is one step further from the pre-reach advance announcement production (first stage) performed in (B) in FIG. 84 above. It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second step pattern image appears in the notice effect before the reach occurrence, but in the effect mode, the third step, fourth step, and fifth step pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high probability (expected degree) of becoming a big hit in the present change by advancing the change of the mode of the advance notice generation before reaching the reach to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In (D) of FIG. 84, the middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and eventually, the variable display of the left effect pattern is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 84 (E): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the right position of the screen, so that a reach state of “5”-“being changed”-“5” has occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as "reach!" Is also performed.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach effect, only the effect pattern corresponding to the tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. In this case, the effect design may be displayed in the four corners of the screen in a reduced state.

[Prevailing production after reach occurrence (first)]
(F) in FIG. 84: When reach state occurs and it is for a while, for example, the notice effect (first time) is performed after reach occurrence in which the images representing the figure of “heart” form a group and obliquely pass over the screen. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice presentation effect after the visually lively reach notice occurrence, an effect of giving the player a greater expectation can be obtained.

[Progress of reach production]
(G) in FIG. 84: Following to the advance notice effect after the first reach occurrence, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a state of forming a three-dimensional row on the screen, and An effect is taken that the image of the numeral is erased from the screen in the order of "2", "3", "4", etc. from the head (front). Such a rendition is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (or suggesting) to the player that the jackpot is "big hit" if the number "5" remains without being erased to the end. In addition, it is a "big hit" when the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, and it is "out" when the number "5" is also erased. In the case of an out of place, for example, the numeral “6” is displayed on the screen after the numeral “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2”, “3”, “4”, the sense of tension and expectation of the player will also increase. Then, if the effect proceeds while the number "4" is actually erased on the screen and the number "5" remains on the screen, the possibility of "big hit" increases, so the player feels tense there. Also increases at a stretch.

[Prevailing production after reach occurrence (second time)]
(H) in FIG. 84: When the reach effect approaches the end of the game, the image of the character is displayed on the screen as if it were divided into large shots and suddenly displayed, and that the character emits some lines (or silently) (The content may be that of smiling). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 5 ”remains without being erased, the possibility of a big hit of“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”increases” as it is ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As another reach effect different from the above, for example, there are developments such as "If the numbers" 2 "to" 4 "are erased and finally the number" 5 "remains without being erased, it becomes a big hit. When an image of a character is made to appear at such a timing, it is possible to obtain an effect of causing the player to have a sense of anticipation that "the jackpot may be closer."

[Intermediate pattern stop]
In FIG. 84 (I): The last medium effect symbol stops. In this example, the effect symbol representing “5” is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen.

  In FIG. 84 (J): For example, stop display is also performed for the stop display effect as the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed on the effect.

  Further, if the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, since the first special symbol that is the current variation target is stopped and displayed with an out symbol, the stop display effect is performed in the same manner as the effect symbol. In this case, by displaying the numbers “4” and “6” other than “5” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. In addition, such an effect is performed as "outside reach effect".

[Challenge bonus production (during production)]
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the challenge bonus effect.
The challenge bonus effect is executed during the big hit game in the case of corresponding to “11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11” or “11 round normal symbol”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 85, (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game, “big hit” is executed. In the special role in effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed in the screen. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the numeral “1”) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. As described above, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called "left eye") even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue teaching the player that the information "I have been won with the effect symbol of 1". In addition, a character “challenge bonus” is displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and an image of a horse character is displayed around the screen.

  Further, during the jackpot game (during special game), character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and an arrow symbol indicating the right portion in the game area 8a is displayed (firing position designation effect).

[5 rounds]
In FIG. 85 (B): After that, when the jackpot game proceeds smoothly and shifts to 5 rounds, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND 5” is displayed on the screen, and unique during the jackpot game The effect image of is displayed. The actual big hit game continues up to eleventh round, but after the sixth round, the big winning opening is short-opened (for example, 0.1 seconds open) in each round. Therefore, the fifth round is a substantial final round.

[At the end of the major role]
(C) in FIG. 85: At the timing when the big hit game is ended, a big-practice end effect for transmitting the effect contents to be executed later is executed. In this example, text information "treasure challenge rush!" Is displayed in the screen.

[Example of production of treasure challenge production]
FIG. 86 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the effect of the treasure challenge effect.
Treasure challenge production is a probability change promotion Judge production that is executed using the 1st change to the 10th change after the end of the big hit game when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation 1 to 11" or "11 round normal pattern" is there. In the treasure challenge production, the horse character performs the production search for the treasure, and if the treasure is found, the fireworks rush is entered. Hereinafter, the flow of the effects will be described in order.

  In (A) in FIG. 86, after the end of the big hit game when it corresponds to “11 round odd symbol 1 to 11” or “11 round normal symbol”, the first variable display is performed, “treasure challenge effect” Is started. In the effect pattern, the variable display effect is executed in a state of being reduced at the upper left corner position of the screen ("during variation"-"during variation"-"during variation"). In the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed.

[Game description effect]
When the treasure challenge effect is started, a game explanation effect is first executed. In the illustrated example, a character of Sennin is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the character of Sennin emits a line saying "If you can find a treasure, you are in a rush into fireworks!"

  In addition, during the treasure challenge (time saving, medium and certain variation), character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and an arrow symbol indicating the right portion in the game area 8a is displayed (firing position designation effect). The launch position specification effect continues to be executed as it is right-handed if the treasure challenge is successful, but it continues to be executed (see (C) and (E) in the figure), but the treasure challenge fails. In this case, the left-handed state is entered, and the process ends (see (F) in the figure).

[When 11 round probability variation symbol 1 wins]
(B) in FIG. 86: When the previous big hit corresponds to "11 round probability odd symbol 1", the number of special changes is one, so that the success effect is executed in the first treasure challenge effect. Specifically, a performance is performed in which a horse character finds a treasure. Then, the character “Success” is displayed at the upper part of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters the line “Fantastic!”.

[At the end of fluctuation]
In FIG. 86 (C): All the effect symbols are stopped and displayed because the first variation (at the time of non-winning) has ended since the end of the big hit game (“1”-“2”-“3”) . Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

  Further, at this timing, an effect of teaching the player the internal state to shift after this is executed. In the illustrated example, text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed in the screen. By executing such an effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “high probability time shortened state” fireworks rush.

[At the time of 11 round probability variation 2-11 or 11 round normal symbol winning]
(D) in FIG. 86: On the other hand, in the case of a win with either “11 round odd symbol 2 to 11” or “11 round normal symbol”, failure representation is executed in the first treasure challenge effect. Then, a character of "failure" is displayed in the upper part of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the character of the hermit emits a line of "sorry".

[At the end of fluctuation]
86 (E): All effect symbols are stopped and displayed due to the end of the first change (at the time of non-winning) since the end of the big hit game ("4"-"5"-"6") . Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

  Also, at this timing, an effect is taught that teaches the player that the treasure challenge effect will continue. In the illustrated example, text information "Continuous treasure challenge!" Is displayed in the screen. And when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbol 2-10", treasure challenge production is continued until the special change set to each winning symbol is finished, and finally, in treasure challenge production Successful performance is executed.

[At the end of fluctuation]
(F) in FIG. 86: On the other hand, when it corresponds to “11 round normal symbol” or “11 round odd symbol 11”, failure presentation is executed even in the tenth change (when not winning) after the end of the big hit game Be done. Further, at this timing, an effect of teaching the player the internal state to shift after this is executed. In the illustrated example, character information "festival mode entry!" Is displayed in the screen. By executing such an effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the festival mode of “low probability or high probability non-time shortened state”. In addition, when it corresponds to "11 round probability figure 11" in high probability non-time shortening state, time reduction frequency is set to 10000 times, in the 10th fluctuation after the end of the big hit game, to execute the success effect be able to.

[Display example of fireworks rush]
FIG. 87 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of fireworks rush.
The fireworks rush is in a state of high probability time reduction, and continues until the special symbol fluctuates 10,000 times unless a winning result is obtained after the big hit game. Hereinafter, the flow of the effects will be described in order.

  87 (A): In the state of “fireworks rush”, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed. The background image of the fireworks rush is a background image in which “a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky” is expressed in order to deeply impress the player with the motif of fireworks. In the upper right portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed.

  In addition, during the definite change (high probability time shortening state), character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and an arrow symbol pointing to the right portion in the game area 8a is displayed (fire position specification effect).

  (B) in FIG. 87: Then, all the production symbols are stopped and displayed by the end of the first fluctuation (at the time of non-winning) after the end of the big hit game ("3"-"1"-"7 "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  87 (C): When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the big hit game is finished. In the high probability time shortening state, since the variable start winning device 28 is operated at a high frequency, as long as the player continues to hit the right, the variation display of the production symbols accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Often.

[Fireworks bonus production]
FIG. 88 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a fireworks bonus effect.
The fireworks bonus effect is an effect that is executed during a big hit game in the case of corresponding to “15 round probability variation symbols 2 to 7” or “3 round probability variation symbols”.

[1 round]
88 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game, “big hit” is executed. In the special role in effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed in the screen. In the upper right area of the display screen, the characters “Fireworks Bonus” are displayed, and an image of an animal character straddling a horse is displayed in the center of the screen.

  Further, during the jackpot game (during special game), character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and an arrow symbol indicating the right portion in the game area 8a is displayed (firing position designation effect).

[The last round]
(B) in FIG. 88: After that, the big hit game proceeds smoothly and shifts to the final round. For example, when 15 rounds of jackpots are being executed, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 15" is displayed in the screen.

[At the end of the major role]
(C) in FIG. 88: At the timing when the big hit game ends, a big-prize end effect of contents teaching the internal state to shift after this is executed. In the illustrated example, text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed in the screen. By executing such a big end completion effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the "high probability time shortening state" fireworks rush as a bonus after the end of the big hit game.

[Normal bonus effect]
FIG. 89 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the effect of the normal bonus effect.
The normal bonus effect is an effect that is executed during the big hit game in the case of corresponding to “5-round normal symbol” or “5-round probability variation symbol” or the like.

[1 round]
In FIG. 89A (A): When the first round of the big hit game in the normal bonus effect is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND 1” is displayed in the screen. In the upper left of the screen, the characters "normal bonus" are displayed, and in the center of the screen, an image of a dog character is displayed.

  Further, during the jackpot game (during special game), character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and an arrow symbol indicating the right portion in the game area 8a is displayed (firing position designation effect).

[5 rounds]
In FIG. 89 (B): After that, when the jackpot game proceeds smoothly and shifts to the final five rounds, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 5" is displayed on the screen, and the jackpot game is in progress. An effect image unique to is displayed.

[At the end of the major role]
89 (C): At the timing (during the ending time) when the big hit game ends when it corresponds to the “5-round normal symbol”, the big role end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, text information “Coast mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “low probability time shortened state” coast mode as a privilege after the big hit game ends. In the case of the “5-round probability variation symbol”, the role promotion effect is executed during the execution of the normal bonus effect, and the process shifts to the fireworks rush.

[Example of production of coast mode]
FIG. 90 is a continuous view showing an example of presentation in the beach mode.
The coast mode is shifted to after the jackpot game is over in the case of the “5-round normal symbol” in the time shortening state. The coast mode is the “low probability time shortening state”. Hereinafter, the flow of the effects will be described in order.

  In FIG. 90 (A): The variation display of the rendering symbol is performed in the "coast mode" state. The background image of the coast mode is a background image having a motif of images of "sand beach", "sea", "mountain", etc. in order to express the impression of healing which is the concept of the coast mode. Further, at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed.

  In addition, during time saving (in a low probability time shortening state), character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and an arrow symbol pointing to the right portion in the game area 8a is displayed (firing position designation effect).

  (B) in FIG. 90: Then, with the end of the current variation (at the time of non-winning), all the rendering symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  (C) in FIG. 90: The next fluctuation is started. This coast mode ends when the special symbol changes 100 times without obtaining the result of winning. When the coast mode ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode with a low probability non-time reduction state. If a winning result is obtained in the coast mode, a reach effect is executed and a big hit is achieved.

[Example of production when winning Super Reach production]
FIGS. 91 to 95 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects at the time of winning the super reach effect.

  Here, the super reach effect is a effect having a higher expectation of winning than reach effects other than the super reach effect (for example, normal reach effect and the like).

[Variation display production start]
91 (A): The column of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled in the vertical direction on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol. The variable display effect is started. Here, it is assumed that an effect pattern that is a big hit after super reach effect is selected.

[First stage]
91 (B): When a certain time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, a first-stage character step-up notice effect (step advance notice effect) using a female character image is executed (step-up 1; SU1).

  The character step-up notice effect is a notice effect in which the mode changes in stages from the first stage to the fifth stage (SU1 to SU5) according to a predetermined order.

[Second stage]
(C) in FIG. 91: In the illustrated example, the second step of the character step-up notice is performed (step-up 2; SU2).

[Stage 3]
(D) in FIG. 92: In the illustrated example, the third step of the character step-up notice is performed (step-up 3; SU3).

[Fourth stage]
(E) in FIG. 92: In the illustrated example, the fourth-step character step-up notice effect is performed (step-up 4; SU4).

[Left production pattern stop, 5th stage]
In FIG. 92 (F): The left effect design symbol representing the numeral "5" is stopped at the left position of the screen. At this stage, the fifth-step character step-up notice effect is executed (step-up 5; SU5).

[Occurrence of reach condition]
93 (G): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol is then stopped and displayed. At this time, the right effect design symbol representing the numeral "5" is stopped and displayed at the right position of the screen. When the right effect design is stopped and displayed, a reach state of the numbers “5”-“being changed”-“5” is generated in a horizontal line (on one line) on the screen. Then, on the screen, an image emphasizing one line in a reach state is displayed together and an effect that a voice "reach!" Is output is executed.

[Notice production after reach occurrence]
In FIG. 93 (H): After a reach state has occurred, for a while, images representing animal characters (for example, white bears) form a group and pass through the screen from right to left. Production is performed. This group notice effect is an effect with a higher expectation level for the big hit than the group notice effect using the heart image described above.

[Super reach production]
In FIG. 93 (I): The reach state continues even after the notice effect is performed after the reach occurrence, and thereafter the super reach effect progresses. In the example shown in the figure, an effect in which a male character appears on a train is executed. In the upper center position of the screen, the variable display effect is executed in a state where the effect pattern is reduced ("5"-"during variation"-"5").

  Then, the interface is hidden when the super reach effect is started. The interface is an information display area for transmitting various information related to the gaming state to the player, and is a pre-change display area X1 and a display area X2 during change. The reason for hiding the interface is to execute the super reach effect in a wider display area. However, the interface display may be continued after this.

  In FIG. 94 (J): Then, an effect that the train stops is executed, a male character appears from the train, and an effect that produces the line “I am the other party !!” is executed.

  In Fig. 94 (K): Following this, "Ghost of the pumpkin" as an enemy character appears on the left side of the screen, and a "male character" as an ally character appears on the right side of the screen. The effect that the characters “” appear is performed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that the battle in the super reach production will start.

  In FIG. 94 (L): Then, at the end of the Super Reach production, “Ghost of pumpkin” delivers countless punches, and a production where a “male character” responds with a chop is executed. In this state, if the "male character" wins, it is a development that becomes a hit.

  In FIG. 95 (M): At the final stage of the super reach effect, the cut-in notice effect is executed. In the illustrated example, a female character or the like is displayed in an area cut left and right on the screen, and the background color of the cut-in is green (weak cut-in). Note that another type of cut-in notice effect with a red background image may be executed (strong cut-in).

[At the time of winning]
In FIG. 95, (N): “Men character” is displayed large together with “Victory!” And “Pumpkin ghost” is displayed small, which means that it is a win (winning). At the upper center position of the screen, the stop display effect is executed with the effect pattern reduced ("5"-"5"-"5"). However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging to the left and right, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the first special symbol is in a fluctuating state, and the fourth symbol Z1 is also variably displayed.

  In FIG. 95, (O): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. After this, a big hit effect according to the winning symbol is executed.

[Example of production at the time of departure of super reach production]
96 and 97 are continuous diagrams showing an example of the effect when the super reach effect is lost and an example of the effect of the wipe effect.
Here, it is assumed that an effect pattern that is to be lost after the super reach effect is selected. In addition, the following example of effects is an example of effects performed after performing the effect of (M) in FIG.

  In FIG. 96 (A): If the current change is out (non-winning), the words "defeat · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · At the center upper position, the effect symbols are displayed in a manner of detachment (for example, “5”-“6”-“5”).

  In FIG. 96 (B): In this case, the middle effect symbol of “6” is displayed large between the left effect symbol of “5” and the right effect symbol of “5”. The first special symbol and the fourth symbol Z1 are in a changing state.

[Wipe effect]
In FIG. 96 (C): After the execution of the specific effect (for example, the super reach effect at the time of non-winning) and before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the wipe effect is executed. The wipe effect is an effect of displaying a wipe display corresponding to an internal state among a plurality of wipe displays having different display modes. More specifically, as the wipe effect, an effect of displaying a wipe display according to the setting value among the plurality of wipe displays indicating the setting value is executed.

  In the illustrated example, the setting suggestion wipe image A (an image in which the contents of the animal character praying to the star is expressed) is displayed as sliding from the right side of the screen, and about one third of the setting suggestion wipe image A Is displayed.

  96D: In the illustrated example, the setting suggestion wipe image A is displayed so as to slide from the right side of the screen, and about two-thirds of the setting suggestion wipe image A is displayed.

  (E) in FIG. 97: In the illustrated example, the setting suggestion wipe image A is displayed to slide from the right side of the screen, and all the setting suggestion wipe images A are displayed.

97 (F): In the illustrated example, the setting suggestion wipe image A is displayed so as to slide to the left side of the screen, and about two-thirds of the setting suggestion wipe image A is displayed.
97 (G): In the illustrated example, the setting suggestion wipe image A is displayed so as to slide to the left side of the screen, and about one third of the setting suggestion wipe image A is displayed.

  In FIG. 97 (H): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol and the fourth symbol Z1 substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking.

  The wipe effect is executed in a predetermined period (for example, about 0.1 second to several seconds) before the first special symbol stops. In addition, the setting suggestion wipe image used in the wipe effect has been described in the example of flowing from the right to the left of the screen, but it is displayed from the center of the screen to the outside or from the outside of the screen to the center. It may be a thing. In addition, the setting suggestion wipe image used in the wipe effect may be displayed by sliding, or may be displayed on the entire screen from the beginning without sliding.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an outline of the wipe effect.
[H01] When a super-reaching effect is finally executed, [H02] a wipe effect is executed. [H02] In the wipe effect at the time of deviation, “setting suggestion wipe image A”, “setting suggestion wipe image B”, “setting suggestion wipe image C”, “setting suggestion wipe image D”, “setting” are set according to the internal state. The suggested wipe image E "or" setting suggested wipe image F "is displayed. On the other hand, in the wipe effect at the time of winning, the “reversal confirmed wipe image” is displayed.

  Then, when the [H02] wipe effect is finished, the screen shifts to the [H03] normal screen. When transitioning to the normal screen at the time of disconnection, a stop display effect is executed. On the other hand, when a transition is made to the normal screen at the time of winning, a changing effect that appears to be a stop display effect is executed.

  [H04] When the screen shifts to the normal screen at the time of a break, the next variation of the special symbol is started when the special symbol stop display time has elapsed. On the other hand, when a transition is made to the normal screen at the time of winning, a reverse jackpot effect (an effect that looks like a disappointment and finally wins) is executed.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the details of the wipe effect.
As “image type” of the wipe effect, “setting suggestion wipe image A” to “setting suggestion wipe image F” and “reverse rotation determined wipe image” are prepared.

  The setting suggestion wipe image A serves as a common wipe for all settings. That is, the setting suggestion wipe image A may be displayed with any setting value.

  The setting suggestion wipe image B has a role of increasing the appearance rate when an odd number is set. That is, the setting suggestion wipe image B is likely to be displayed in setting 1, setting 3 or setting 5. The setting suggestion wipe image B is an image in which the content of an animal character offering a prayer to the moon is expressed.

  The setting suggestion wipe image C has a role of increasing the appearance rate at the even setting. That is, the setting suggestion wipe image C is likely to be displayed in setting 2, setting 4 or setting 6. The setting suggestion wipe image C is an image in which the content of an animal character offering a prayer to the sun is expressed.

  The setting suggestion wipe image D has a role of appearing only when 4, 5, or 6 is set. That is, the setting suggestion wipe image D is displayed only in setting 4, setting 5 or setting 6. The setting suggestion wipe image D is an image in which the content of a male character riding a train is expressed.

  The setting suggestion wipe image E has a role of appearing only at the time of setting 5 or 6. That is, the setting suggestion wipe image E is displayed only in the setting 5 or the setting 6. The setting suggestion wipe image E is an image in which a male character is displayed alone.

  The setting suggestion wipe image F has a role of appearing only when six settings are made. That is, the setting suggestion wipe image F is displayed only in the setting 6. The setting suggestion wipe image F is an image in which the characters of two animals are displayed.

  The reverse determination wipe image has a role of determining a reverse jackpot. That is, the reverse determination wipe image does not indicate the setting. However, the reverse rotation determined wipe image may be an image that determines the jackpot and suggests any setting (for example, an image that determines the jackpot and sets 6).

For example, when the setting suggestion wipe image C and the setting suggestion wipe image D occur frequently (when the appearance frequency is higher than other images), it is assumed that “the setting of this gaming machine is 4 or 6”. be able to.
Further, when the setting suggestion wipe image B and the setting suggestion wipe image D occur frequently, it can be estimated that “the setting of this gaming machine is 5”.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach notice effect, memory number display effect, big role effect, wipe effect, etc. are all controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in the timer interrupt process separately from the reset start process of the effect control device (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt period (for example, a period of several tens μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process of the effect control device, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), operation memory effect management process (step S401), effect pattern management process (step S402), launch position specification effect management process (step S403), display output process (step S404) , Lamp driving processing (step S406), acoustic driving processing (step S408), production random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412) and a group of subroutines. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state specification command, round number command, error notification command, big hit end production command, number cut Counter value command, change pattern destination determination command, stop display time end command, prize ball content command, launch position designation command, normal game management phase command, special game management phase command, power supply restoration designation command, RAM clear designation command, setting confirmation There is a specification command etc.

  Step S401: In the action memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the memory number display effect and the execution of the advance notice effect using markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, or at the time of the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. The contents of effects are controlled (variable display effect execution means, effect execution means). Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach occurrence, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S403: In the launch position designation effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the launch position designation effect (launch position designation effect execution means). Specifically, when the content of the launch position designation command is a right-handed value, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a launch position designation effect.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 sends basic control information of the effect contents to the VDP 152 (for example, the number of operation memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, operation memory effect pattern number, advance notice The effect pattern number, the change effect pattern number, the change time advance effect number, the background pattern number, etc. are indicated. Thereby, the VDP 152 controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed contents of the effect (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driver IC 132. In response to this, the driver IC 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53 and the like based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the voice IC 134 on the contents of the effect (for example, BGM during the variable display effect or reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the big hit effect, audio data, etc.) . Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronism with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Operational memory effect management process]
FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation storage effect management process. The contents will be described below along the procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the effect memory number increase effect command is stored (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702 and step S703. If the effect memory number increase effect command can not be confirmed (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S702 and step S703.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an operation memory number increase effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Step S703: The effect control CPU 126 executes prefetch effect management processing (prefetch effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes determination processing as to whether or not to execute pre-reading effects (marker change effects, zone effects, continuous effects, etc.), and if it is determined that pre-reading effects are to be executed, pre-reading effects The process of determining the specific contents of is executed.

  By executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126 is executed across a plurality of special symbol variations when the condition for executing preread effect is satisfied (when the special effect execution condition is satisfied). Prefetching effect can be executed (prefetching effect executing means).

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If the effect memory number reduction effect command can not be confirmed (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes an operation memory number decrease effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 is changing the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery and the effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol from the pre-fluctuation display area X1. An effect to be moved to the display area X2 is selected. The stored marker moved to the display area X2 during fluctuation selects an effect to be deleted at the end of the fluctuation.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 100).

[Reproduction symbol management processing]
FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of effect design management processing. The effect symbol management process (effect execution means), execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502), effect symbol changing process (step S504), effect symbol stop displaying process (step S506) and The subroutine of the variable winning device activation process (step S508) is included. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the address of the return destination. Which process to select as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, in the situation where the variable display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol in-progress process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol in-process has been completed, the next As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device activation process (step S508) is performed when the big hit variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 33) is selected in the main control CPU 72 or the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 33). When the middle step S6000) is selected, it is selected as a jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 carries out an operation for adjusting the conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. Further, in this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, fluctuation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the advance effect (reach other than the advance notice effect pattern) Pre-occurrence notice pattern, reach occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the VDP 152 as necessary. For example, when performing the effect using the effect switching button 45 while executing the variable display effect using the effect design, the effect control CPU 126 monitors the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button by the player, and the effect according to the result The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the VDP 152.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in a mode according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the VDP 152 to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the VDP 152 ends the variable display effect which has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the player can be taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) the result of the internal lottery to the effect (effect executing means) ). At the time of the small hit, it is possible to execute the stop indication effect in the same manner as or similar to the removal.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of a 15 round big hit, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 15 round high playing effect pattern as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the VDP 152. As a result, the image of the prominent effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

[Demonstration symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned effect pattern fluctuation pre-processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S670: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S672.

  Step S672: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control processing as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output processing (step S404 in FIG. 100) and the lamp drive processing (step S406 in FIG. 100). To do.

  On the other hand, when it is confirmed in step S670 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S674.

  Step S674: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S682. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S676. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S676: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (unsettled) (step S674: No), the effect control CPU 126 then checks whether or not the present variation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S680. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since the remaining is only the lottery result command at the time of small hit, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S678. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S678: The effect control CPU 126 executes small hit time fluctuation effect pattern selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the change pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 may select the effect pattern number corresponding to the change pattern command at that time with reference to the effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The effect pattern numbers may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  In addition, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect table (not shown), and the fluctuation pattern of the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern number at that time (type of fluctuation time and reach and reach occurrence timing), stop The display mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but in the case of hitting the big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S676 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S680.

  Step S680: The effect control CPU 126 executes a jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on fluctuation pattern commands (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. In the big hit time effect pattern selection processing, the processing may be further branched for each big hit time stop symbol. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S674 (Yes), it next executes step S682.

  Step S682: The effect control CPU 126 executes an off time fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of the departure are classified into, for example, “a normal change in occurrence”, “time-to-day variation”, “a change in reach variation”, etc. Further, “reach change variation” defines a fine reach variation pattern. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of losing is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect table (not shown), and the fluctuation pattern of the effect pattern corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (if there is fluctuation time or reach occurrence, reach occurrence , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.). The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  When any one of the above steps S678, S680, and S682 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S684.

  Step S684: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The contents of the advance notice effect are determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or not winning) or the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time shortening state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  Thus, when the effect control CPU 126 wins the lottery whether or not to execute the advance effect (when the prescribed effect execution condition is satisfied), the effect control CPU 126 is elected during the execution of the variable display effect (predetermined effect) A preview effect is executed that indicates that the effect pattern is stopped and displayed in a mode (regarding the predetermined effect that suggests the success or failure of the predetermined effect) (prediction effect execution means).

  In addition, when it is determined that the notice effect is to be executed in the notice selection process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining at which timing during the variable display the notice effect is to be started. In addition, various types of notice effects (step-up notice effects, conversation notice effects, cut-in notice effects, group notice effects, feature fall effects, next notice effects, title color change effects, etc., are performed during the change display. ), A pseudo-continuous notice effect, a prefetch notice effect, a memory marker change notice effect, and the like are also included.

  Step S686: The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is “normal mode (low probability non-time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image in which a female character is sitting on a chaise longue. In addition, when the stay mode is "firework rush (high probability time shortening state)", the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image having a fireworks motif. Furthermore, when the stay mode is “coast mode (low probability time shortening state)”, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image having a coast motif.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 102), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is performed based on the notice effect pattern.

[Big win time fluctuation production pattern selection processing]
FIG. 104 is a flowchart of an exemplary procedure of jackpot variation presentation pattern selection processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. This makes it possible to confirm what kind of jackpot fluctuation pattern this fluctuation is.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the loaded fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation pattern is the special fluctuation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S804 and can not confirm that the current fluctuation pattern is the special fluctuation pattern (No) The effect control CPU 126 executes step S806.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process per special variation pattern. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that is a big hit in the treasure challenge effect.

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes a reach after hit effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern such as a normal reach effect or a super reach effect according to the type of change pattern (long or short change time).

  Step S808: The effect control CPU 126 executes a reverse effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the reverse effect in the normal reach effect, the super reach effect, etc. by lottery, and when it is determined to be executed, the reach effect is temporarily not won. While displaying this mode, the reverse rotation determined wipe image is displayed, and the process of selecting the effect pattern that will ultimately be a big hit is executed.

  Then, when the above processing is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 103).

[Time-of-hour variation effect pattern selection process]
FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing an example of procedure of out-of-time variation effect pattern selection processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. This makes it possible to confirm what kind of out-of-date variation pattern this variation is.

  Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether the loaded fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation pattern is the special fluctuation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S826 and can not confirm that the current fluctuation pattern is the special fluctuation pattern (No) The effect control CPU 126 executes step S824.

  Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the loaded fluctuation pattern is a deviation fluctuation pattern after reaching.

  As a result, if it is confirmed that the present fluctuation pattern is the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S 828 and can not confirm that the present fluctuation pattern is the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern If (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S830.

  Step S826: The effect control CPU 126 executes the special variation pattern deviation effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes the treasure challenge effect during the change of the special symbol, and continues the treasure challenge effect based on the type of the previous winning symbol, shifts to the fireworks rush, or the festival mode Select an effect pattern to be transferred.

  Step S828: The effect control CPU 126 executes an off-reach effect selection process. Specifically, based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72, the effect control CPU 126 executes a reach effect (such as a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) to select an effect pattern that is to be left.

  By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 determines that the result of the special symbol lottery is not won and the out-of-super reach variation pattern is selected (a specific effect execution condition is satisfied ), A specific effect (super reach effect at the time of losing) can be executed during execution of the variable display effect (specific effect execution means).

  Step S830: The effect control CPU 126 executes non-reaching effect selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that is a deviation without executing the reach effect, based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72.

  Step S832: The effect control CPU 126 executes the wipe effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process for determining whether or not to execute the wipe effect, and executes a process for determining the type of the setting suggestion wipe image when it is determined to execute it.

  By executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126 displays a plurality of wipe displays (settings suggestive wipe images A to E) different in display mode after the specific effect is executed and before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Wipe effect (wipe effect executing means, wipe display control means) for displaying the wipe display (one of setting suggestion wipe images A to E) according to the internal state (value of setting) among them).

  Further, by executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs wipe display according to the setting value among the plurality of wipe displays (setting suggestion wipe images A to E) that indicate the setting value as the wipe effect. It is possible to execute an effect that displays (any of the setting suggestion wipe images A to E) (wipe effect execution means, wipe display control means).

  Then, when the above processing is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 103).

[Wipe effect selection process]
FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the wipe effect selection process. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S840: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. This makes it possible to confirm what kind of out-of-date variation pattern this variation is.

  Step S842: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the loaded fluctuation pattern is a deviation fluctuation pattern after super reach.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation pattern is the post-reach reach fluctuation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S844, and the current fluctuation pattern is the post-reach reach fluctuation pattern. When the confirmation cannot be made (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variation effect pattern selection process at the time of deviation (FIG. 105).

  Step S844: The effect control CPU 126 executes setting suggestion wipe image selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the content of the setting suggestion wipe image displayed in the wipe effect while referring to a setting suggestion wipe image selection table to be described later.

  Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the off-time variation effect pattern selection process (FIG. 105).

[Setting suggestion wipe image selection table]
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of configuration of a setting suggestion wipe image selection table.
This table is a table used when determining the content (type) of the setting suggestion wipe image in the setting suggestion wipe image selection processing (step S844 in FIG. 106).

  In the left column of the figure, setting values are displayed. Specifically, “1” to “6” are displayed. The effect control CPU 126 can confirm the setting value by referring to the setting confirmation designation command.

  On the other hand, the image type is displayed in the upper part of the figure. Specifically, “A” to “F” are displayed. Note that “A” means “setting suggestion wipe image A”, and “F” means “setting suggestion wipe image F”.

[Setting 1]
When the setting value is “1”, the ratio that “setting suggestion wipe image A” is selected as the image type is “80%”, and the ratio that “setting suggestion wipe image B” is selected is “15%”. The ratio at which “setting suggestion wipe image C” is selected is “5%”.

[Setting 2]
When the setting value is “2”, the ratio that “setting suggestion wipe image A” is selected as the image type is “70%”, and the ratio that “setting suggestion wipe image B” is selected is “10%”. ”And the ratio at which“ setting suggestion wipe image C ”is selected is“ 20% ”.

[Setting 3]
When the setting value is “3”, the ratio that “setting suggestion wipe image A” is selected as the image type is “70%”, and the ratio that “setting suggestion wipe image B” is selected is “20%”. The ratio at which “setting suggestion wipe image C” is selected is “10%”.

[Setting 4]
When the setting value is “4”, the ratio that “setting suggestion wipe image A” is selected as the image type is “65%”, and the ratio that “setting suggestion wipe image B” is selected is “10%”. The ratio at which “setting suggestion wipe image C” is selected is “20%”, and the ratio at which “setting suggestion wipe image D” is selected is “5%”.

[Setting 5]
When the setting value is “5”, the ratio that “setting suggestion wipe image A” is selected as the image type is “65%”, and the ratio that “setting suggestion wipe image B” is selected is “20%”. , “The setting suggestion wipe image C” is selected at “10%”, “the setting suggestion wipe image D” is selected at “3%”, and “setting suggestion wipe image E” is selected. The rate at which “is selected is“ 2% ”.

[Setting 6]
When the setting value is “6”, the ratio that “setting suggestion wipe image A” is selected as the image type is “60%”, and the ratio that “setting suggestion wipe image B” is selected is “10%”. ”, The ratio at which“ setting suggestion wipe image C ”is selected is“ 25% ”, the ratio at which“ setting suggestion wipe image D ”is selected is“ 2% ”, and“ setting suggestion wipe image E ” The ratio at which “is selected” is “2%”, and the ratio at which “setting suggestion wipe image F” is selected is “1%”.

  As described above, this table has a table configuration that facilitates the role of each setting suggestion wipe image shown in FIG.

  In addition, a plurality of wipe displays (setting suggestion wipe images A to E) are special wipe displays (setting suggestion wipe images F) that suggest the maximum value (setting 6) as the setting value, and the maximum setting value. Non-special wipe display (setting suggestion wipe images A to E) indicating a value other than the value (settings 1 to 5) is included. Then, the appearance rate of the special wipe display (setting suggestion wipe image F) is set lower than the appearance rate of the non-special wipe display (setting suggestion wipe images A to E).

[Mode effect management process]
FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of mode effect management processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the internal state is a time shortening state (low probability time shortening state or high probability time shortening state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the state designation command, and confirms whether or not the internal state is a time reduction state.

  As a result, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes Step S856. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S852.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern. This confirmation can be performed by confirming the fluctuation pattern command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S854.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the previous winning symbol is “5-round normal symbol”. For confirmation as to which symbol the previous winning symbol corresponds to and which status the previous internal status was in, the RAM 130 stores information on the winning symbol and information on the internal status at the time of the previous winning. Can be realized by

  As a result, when it is not possible to confirm that the previous winning symbol is “5-round normal symbol” (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S860. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the previous winning symbol is “5-round normal symbol” (Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S862.

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the non-time-shortened state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a “normal mode” background image or a “festival mode” background image. For example, in the low probability non-time shortening state, the effect control CPU 126 basically executes a process of selecting a background image in the “normal mode”. Further, after the treasure challenge effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the background image of the “festival mode”, and when the special symbol changes a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times) in the low probability non-time shortening state, the “normal mode Execute processing to select the background image of

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for treasure challenge effect.

  Step S860: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for fireworks rush.

  Step S862: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a background image for the coast mode.

  When one of the processes in steps S 856 to S 862 is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing (FIG. 103).

[Process when variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of variable winning device activation processing. The variable winning device operation process is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device operation in-process (step S906), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908). (Program module) is a configuration including a group. Here, first, the basic flow of the variable winning device operating process will be described along each process.

  Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S904 to S908) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the variable winning device activation process as the stack pointer as the return address.

  Which process to select as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, in the situation where the variable winning device operation pre-processing is not yet started, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. Also, if the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device in-operation processing (step S906) as the next jump destination. Furthermore, if the variable winning device in-operation process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation post-process (step S 908) as the next jump destination.

  Step S904: In the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the contents of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game.

For example, when it corresponds to "11 round normal symbol" and "11 round odd symbol 1-11", the process which selects a challenge bonus presentation is performed.
In addition, when it corresponds to “15 round probability variation 1”, processing for selecting a special bonus effect is executed.
Furthermore, when it corresponds to the “6 round probability variation symbol” or “8 round probability variation symbol”, a process of selecting a big role effect (mode transition effect) that suddenly shifts to the fireworks rush is executed.

  On the other hand, when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation symbols 2 to 7" or "3 round probability variation symbols", a process of selecting a fireworks bonus effect is executed. In addition, when it corresponds to “5 round probability odd design symbol”, during execution of normal bonus production (5 round big hit production), the processing which selects the production which executes major part promotion production is executed. Furthermore, when it corresponds to "5 round normal symbol", processing which selects the production which executes normal bonus production (5 round big hit production) is executed.

  Step S906: In the variable winning device in-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information to instruct the VDP 152 as necessary. For example, when the effect using the effect switching button 45 is performed during execution of the big hit effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button by the player, and the effect content (button effect) according to the result. Control information is indicated to VDP 152.

  Step S908: In the variable winning device operation post-process, the effect control CPU 126 executes the effect of transmitting the mode of the transition destination to the player during the ending time of the variable winning device.

  The effect control CPU 126 executes coast mode entry effect or fireworks rush entry effect according to the winning symbol. Specifically, when winning the game, if it corresponds to "11 round normal symbol" or "11 round odd symbol 1 to 11", a process is executed to select an effect indicating entry into "treasure challenge" , "15 round probability variation 1", "15 round probability variation 2 to 7", "3 round probability variation", "5 round probability variation" If it corresponds to the effect that indicates that rush into the fireworks rush Is executed, and if it corresponds to "5 round regular symbol", a process is executed to select an effect indicating entering the coast mode.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) According to this embodiment, in order to execute a wipe effect that displays a wipe display (any of the setting suggestion wipe images A to E) according to the internal state (setting value), An opportunity to guess the state can be given, and a novel wipe effect can be executed.

(2) According to the present embodiment, the wipe effect is executed after execution of the specific effect (super reach effect at the time of removal) performed at the time of non-winning, so comparison with the case where the wipe effect is performed at the time of winning Thus, the number of occurrences of the wipe effect can be increased, and the player can be given more opportunities to infer the internal state.

(3) According to the present embodiment, in order to execute the effect of displaying the wipe display (one of the setting suggestion wipe images A to E) according to the setting value as the wipe effect, setting for the player is performed. An opportunity to guess can be given, and a novel wipe production can be performed.

(4) According to the present embodiment, since the wipe display suggesting the setting value is displayed at the time of non-winning, if the setting suggestion is performed at a place where the appearance rate is low (such as after a big hit), the player is few. Judgment of the setting is required by the number of appearances, but by performing the wipe effect at a place with a high appearance rate (after reaching the reach etc.), the number of appearances of the wipe display suggesting the setting can be increased. It is possible to make the player more conjecture with the expectation that “it may be high” or the “presumed high setting”.

(5) According to the present embodiment, the appearance rate of the special wipe display (setting suggestion wipe image F) is lower than the appearance rate of the non-special wipe display (setting suggestion wipe images A to E). In addition to the ability to improve the value, by displaying a valuable special wipe display, playing a dual benefit such as a sense of accomplishment that saw a rare display, and a sense of satisfaction that the highest setting has been decided by it Can be given to

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  In the embodiment described above, the specific effect has been described using an example of a super reach effect at the time of disconnection, but it may be a reach effect at the time of disconnection or may be a non-reach effect at the time of disconnection It may be an effect.

  In the embodiment described above, the wipe effect is described as an example of performing as an effect that suggests a set value, but may be performed as an effect that suggests an internal state (for example, the presence or absence of a probability change state, the presence or absence of a time saving state, etc.) Good.

In this case, the contents of the following effects can be considered.
For example, a first wipe image indicating a special symbol height probability state and a second wipe image indicating a special symbol low probability state are prepared. When the internal state is the special symbol height probability state, the appearance rate of the first wipe image is 60%, and the appearance rate of the second wipe image is 40%. On the other hand, when the internal state is the special symbol low probability state, the appearance rate of the first wipe image is 40%, and the appearance rate of the second wipe image is 60%. In such a situation, a latent probability change state (a state in which the internal state is unknown on the effect) is set, and the player is made to guess the probability change state by the wipe effect after super-reach at the time of loss. It should be noted that the contents of such effects can be similarly applied to effects or the like that suggest the presence or absence of a time-short state as an internal state.

  In the embodiment described above, an example in which the present invention is applied to a so-called loop type (type in which a practical upper limit is not set for the number of definite variations) is described. The present invention may be applied to a type) gaming machine.

  In the embodiment described above, although the example in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine having no definite change area is described, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine having a positive change area.

  In the embodiment described above, the first process is the timer interrupt process, and the second process is the serial communication reception interrupt process. However, the first process may not be the interrupt process. For example, the first process may be a main loop process, and the second process may be a timer interrupt process or a serial communication reception interrupt process.

In the above-described embodiment, when executing the interrupt non-permission process, the example of executing the interrupt prohibition process before executing the interrupt non-permission process has been described, but when the interrupt is already prohibited, The interrupt non-permission process may be performed without executing the interrupt prohibition process.
For example, the interrupt permission process (step S201a) and the interrupt prohibition process (step S163) may not be executed.

  In the embodiment described above, among the processing for calculating the base as the special information (special program code / special program data) to be arranged in the use area, the determination processing for determining whether to calculate the base based on the gaming state. And although an example which included information about processing of at least one side among confirmation processings which confirm a value of a prize ball number was explained, processing other than judgment processing and confirmation processing among processings which calculate a base to special information The special information may include only information related to the determination process or only information related to the confirmation process.

  In the embodiment described above, an example in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that does not employ "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol" has been described, but for a gaming machine adopting the simultaneous rotation Even the present invention can be applied. In this case, the playability of small hit rush (playability where a small hit is frequently generated in the second special symbol lottery) can be added.

In the case of adopting simultaneous turning, for example, a gaming machine provided with at least one of the following configurations can be provided.
(1) While the first special symbol is fluctuating, the second special symbol can also be fluctuating.
(2) Depending on the gaming state, the average variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be set to a long time or a short time.
(3) In the latent probability variation state (high probability non-time shortened state), the average variation time of the second special symbol can be set to a shorter time than other game states (for example, normal state, low probability non-time shortened state, etc.) And set a high probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery (if it is not a big win, it will be won about 100% or close to it). By this, it is possible to set so that the ball increases even if the big hit game is not executed in the latent probability change state.
(4) In the latent probability change state, the game proceeds in a right-handed state.

In the above-described embodiment, an example of a gaming machine including a performance display monitor and a setting change device has been described. In this case, a gaming machine including at least one of the following configurations can be provided.
(1) When setting is provided, setting values can be displayed on the performance display monitor.
(2) A plurality of kinds of special symbol lottery winning probabilities (for example, a jackpot lottery winning probability) are stored, and any one of the probabilities can be set by operating a predetermined operation member or the like.
(3) It is possible to display on the performance display monitor 200 which probability is set (which setting is set). In this case, for example, after the base value is displayed, the display is periodically switched to the display of the set value, a place that is turned on according to the set value (a place where the LED is turned on according to the set value), Information to be identified can be displayed.

Regarding the out switch 99 (out sensor), the following modifications are possible.
(1) The example in which one out switch 99 is arranged in the joining passage (total discharge passage) of the game board unit 8 has been described, but it may be arranged in the total discharge passage on the main body frame side instead of the game board unit 8. . In this way, the main body frame may be used as it is even if the game board unit 8 is replaced (because it may be reused). It can lead to reduction.

(2) On the gaming board unit 8 side, an out switch is provided at each winning opening, inside or near each out opening, and the values detected by each out switch are summed up to calculate the number of out balls. Good.

(3) An out sensor is provided on the game board unit 8 near the exit of the launch rail or near the entrance to the right hitting area, and the game ball hit in the game area before winning or out is detected to detect the out ball The number may be determined. Also, the out switch 99 may be provided in plural instead of one, and may be provided on the game board unit 8 (on the game area) like a gate.

  In the embodiment described above, whether or not a big hit game is being executed, whether it is a time shortening state, whether or not the value of the launch position designation status is “1” (whether or not right hitting is in progress In the example of determining whether to calculate the base by three items such as?), But whether the value of the launch position specification status is "1" (whether or not the right strike is in progress) Whether or not to calculate the base may be determined based on only one item.

  Further, depending on the game specification, a combination thereof may be set freely, such as determining any two items or any one item among the above three items. For example, in the case of a game specification in which there is no time saving state or right hitting state, it is possible to judge only one item of "whether or not a big hit game is being executed". It is also possible to determine whether or not to calculate the base with only one item of "whether or not the big hit game is being executed" even if the state is provided.

  In the embodiment described above, an example is shown in which a value obtained by dividing the number of regular prize balls by the number of regular outs is displayed as a base to be displayed on the performance display monitor 200, but for example, the number of prize balls acquired during a big hit game is A value divided by the number of outs in the game may be displayed.

  In the embodiment described above, as a calculation method for calculating the base, the base is calculated by shifting the quotient one bit to the right after obtaining a value (quotient) that is usually twice the number of outs. The base may be calculated by the method of

  In the embodiment described above, when the lowest bit of the quotient is “1 B” when obtaining the final base, the quotient is shifted by 1 bit to the right and then “1” is added to calculate the base. However, when the least significant bit of the quotient is “1 B”, the base may be calculated by adding “1” to the quotient and then shifting it to the right by one bit.

Main controller 70 may cause performance display monitor 200 to perform power-on operations when power is turned on.
When the power is turned on, the four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 (which may include dot segments) of the performance display monitor 200 are displayed in a predetermined pattern for confirming the operation until the base display is started after the power is turned on. It is an operation of lighting for a predetermined time (full flashing, full lighting, sequential lighting, etc.).

Further, lighting with such a predetermined pattern may be performed before displaying the set value, or after displaying the set value, as long as it is before displaying the base.
And when lighting with a predetermined pattern before displaying the set value, the setting value cannot be displayed until the lighting with the predetermined pattern is completed, but when lighting with the predetermined pattern after displaying the setting value There is an advantage that the set value can be confirmed early.

  Although the performance display monitor 200 has been described as an example in which the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are switched and displayed when displaying the base, the display pattern is not limited to this, and the current display It is also possible to store and display by switching the base of more than two sections, such as the base of the section, the base of the previous section, and the base of the last-previous section.

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure and board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 1 and specific numerical values are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it is needless to say that these can be appropriately modified.

The following technical ideas can be extracted from the embodiment described above.
(1) The first technical idea is a configuration for performing any one of “normal return”, “RAM clear return”, “setting reference mode”, and “setting change mode” by an operation.
The gaming machine includes a setting change device and two input devices (switches), and shifts to one of four states (normal return, RAM clear return, setting reference mode, and setting change mode) when power is restored. The four states are determined by the combination of two input devices (four combinations of ON and OFF).

One of the input devices is preferably a setting key switch. As the other input device, a setting switch, a RAM clear switch, other switches and the like can be applied.
The setting is determined when one of the input devices is turned off during the setting change. In the conventional technique, since the setting is confirmed when the lever is turned on, there is no technique in which the setting is confirmed when one input device is turned off.
The setting during the setting change may be confirmed by another operation (for example, pressing of a confirmation switch provided separately or other processing).

  The gaming machine has a first input device (switch for detecting the operation state of the setting key) that can be turned on / off related to the setting change and a second input device that can be turned on / off related to the setting change (pressed state of the RAM clear switch And a means for setting four states (normal return state, RAM clear return state, setting reference mode state, setting change mode state) by a combination of the first input device and the second input device.

(2) The second technical idea is a configuration in which the set value is displayed in the use area when displayed on the performance display monitor.
The gaming machine includes a performance display monitor capable of displaying a base and a setting change device capable of changing a setting value, and displays the setting value on the performance display monitor.
Further, the process of displaying the set value on the performance display monitor is executed outside the area.

(3) The third technical idea is a configuration in which an original process relating to the performance display monitor is not performed during a setting change (reference).
The gaming machine executes a first process relating to the performance display monitor and a second process relating to the setting change, and restricts at least a part of the execution of the other process while one process is being performed.
Also, the process of determining whether or not to limit is performed outside the area.

(4) The fourth technical idea is reset processing of main command permission.
The gaming machine prohibits the payout of the payout control device 92 by not setting a main command permission signal on the main control device 70 side so as not to receive a command from the payout control device 92 during setting change or setting reference. doing.

(5) The fifth technical idea is a configuration in which a command indicating that the setting is being changed is transmitted from the main control to the payout control.
The game machine transmits a payout operation stop command from the main control device 70 side during setting change or setting reference, and prohibits the payout control device 92 from paying out.

(6) The sixth technical idea is to shift to save processing at the time of power failure when the setting change is completed.
The gaming machine executes a first process not related to the setting change and a second process related to the setting change, and executes at least a part of the first process after the second process is completed.
In addition, the gaming machine includes means for executing processing at the time of power recovery and means for executing setting related processing relating to setting change or setting reference. After execution of the setting related processing, at least one of the processing at power recovery is performed. Execute the part.

(7) The seventh technical idea is a configuration relating to a setting key as a switch for shifting to a “setting change state” or a “setting confirmation state”.
The gaming machine can change the setting using the setting key, and there is an insertion part for inserting the setting key. The setting key has ON / OFF. When the setting key is ON, the setting key is removed from the insertion part. If the setting can be changed without omission and the setting key is OFF, the setting key can be removed from the insertion portion and the setting can not be changed.
In addition, in the gaming machine, when the setting key is turned off during setting change, the setting is fixed.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation | movement memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 production control device 126 production control CPU

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine having a plurality of internal states regarding gaming,
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game;
When the predetermined lottery is executed, the symbol display means for displaying the symbols in a manner corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery after the symbols are variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time;
A variable display effect executing means for executing a variable display effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbol;
When the predetermined lottery result is non-winning and a specific performance execution condition is satisfied, a specific performance execution means for executing the specific performance during execution of the variable display effect;
A wipe effect execution means for executing a wipe effect that displays a wipe display corresponding to the internal state among a plurality of wipe displays having different display modes after the specific effect is executed and before the symbol is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine comprising and. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
As a part of the internal state, there is at least a setting related to the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, and a setting change device capable of changing the setting is provided.
The wipe effect execution means is
A gaming machine that executes an effect of displaying a wipe display according to the set value among a plurality of wipe displays suggesting the set value as the wipe effect. In the gaming machine according to claim 2,
The plurality of wipe displays are
The special wipe indication that suggests the maximum value as the value of the setting, and the non-special wipe indication that indicates a value other than the maximum value as the value of the setting,
The appearance rate of the special wipe display is
A gaming machine characterized by being lower than the appearance rate of the non-special wipe display.